[go: up one dir, main page]

TWI905243B - Reinforcing membranes, optical components and electronic components - Google Patents

Reinforcing membranes, optical components and electronic components

Info

Publication number
TWI905243B
TWI905243B TW110128733A TW110128733A TWI905243B TW I905243 B TWI905243 B TW I905243B TW 110128733 A TW110128733 A TW 110128733A TW 110128733 A TW110128733 A TW 110128733A TW I905243 B TWI905243 B TW I905243B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
weight
polymer
adhesive
adhesive layer
less
Prior art date
Application number
TW110128733A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TW202212125A (en
Inventor
舟木千尋
佐佐木翔悟
Original Assignee
日商日東電工股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 日商日東電工股份有限公司 filed Critical 日商日東電工股份有限公司
Publication of TW202212125A publication Critical patent/TW202212125A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI905243B publication Critical patent/TWI905243B/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/30Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by the adhesive composition
    • C09J7/38Pressure-sensitive adhesives [PSA]
    • C09J7/381Pressure-sensitive adhesives [PSA] based on macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions involving only carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds
    • C09J7/385Acrylic polymers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B27/00Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B27/00Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
    • B32B27/30Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin comprising vinyl (co)polymers; comprising acrylic (co)polymers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B7/00Layered products characterised by the relation between layers; Layered products characterised by the relative orientation of features between layers, or by the relative values of a measurable parameter between layers, i.e. products comprising layers having different physical, chemical or physicochemical properties; Layered products characterised by the interconnection of layers
    • B32B7/04Interconnection of layers
    • B32B7/12Interconnection of layers using interposed adhesives or interposed materials with bonding properties
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L43/00Compositions of homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and containing boron, silicon, phosphorus, selenium, tellurium or a metal; Compositions of derivatives of such polymers
    • C08L43/04Homopolymers or copolymers of monomers containing silicon
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J11/00Features of adhesives not provided for in group C09J9/00, e.g. additives
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J133/00Adhesives based on homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical, or of salts, anhydrides, esters, amides, imides, or nitriles thereof; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J143/00Adhesives based on homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and containing boron, silicon, phosphorus, selenium, tellurium, or a metal; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers
    • C09J143/04Homopolymers or copolymers of monomers containing silicon
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J175/00Adhesives based on polyureas or polyurethanes; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers
    • C09J175/04Polyurethanes
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/30Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by the adhesive composition
    • C09J7/38Pressure-sensitive adhesives [PSA]
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2270/00Resin or rubber layer containing a blend of at least two different polymers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2457/00Electrical equipment
    • B32B2457/20Displays, e.g. liquid crystal displays, plasma displays
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2301/00Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J2301/30Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the chemical, physicochemical or physical properties of the adhesive or the carrier
    • C09J2301/312Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the chemical, physicochemical or physical properties of the adhesive or the carrier parameters being the characterizing feature

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Adhesive Tapes (AREA)
  • Adhesives Or Adhesive Processes (AREA)
  • Laminated Bodies (AREA)

Abstract

本發明提供一種補強用膜,其能夠在貼附於被黏著體之初期顯示輕剝離性,其後使黏著力大幅地上升,且具有彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力。補強用膜具備黏著劑層。上述黏著劑層包含聚合物(A)及聚合物(B)。上述聚合物(B)包含具有聚有機矽氧烷骨架之單體單元及(甲基)丙烯酸系單體單元。又,上述黏著劑層於23℃下之表面彈性模數為1~20 kPa。This invention provides a reinforcing film that exhibits slight peelability initially upon attachment to an adhesive, followed by a significant increase in adhesive strength, and possesses flexural resilience and flexural retention. The reinforcing film comprises an adhesive layer. The adhesive layer comprises polymer (A) and polymer (B). Polymer (B) comprises monomer units having a polysiloxane backbone and (meth)acrylate monomer units. Furthermore, the adhesive layer has a surface elastic modulus of 1–20 kPa at 23°C.

Description

補強用膜、光學構件及電子構件Reinforcing membranes, optical components and electronic components

本發明係關於一種補強用膜、以及貼合有該補強用膜之光學構件及電子構件。本申請主張基於2020年8月6日提出申請之日本專利申請2020-134187號之優先權,該申請之全部內容以參照之方式組入本說明書中。This invention relates to a reinforcing film, and optical and electronic components having the reinforcing film adhered thereto. This application claims priority to Japanese Patent Application No. 2020-134187, filed on August 6, 2020, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

黏著劑以將被黏著體彼此接著、或將物品固定於被黏著體等為目的,以黏著片材之形態廣泛用於行動電話、智慧型手機、平板型個人電腦等攜帶型電子機器及其他電子機器等各種用途。例如,黏著片材被用作對構成上述機器之光學構件或電子構件等賦予剛性或耐衝擊性之補強材(補強用膜)。作為揭示此種先前技術之文獻,可例舉專利文獻1及2。Adhesives are widely used in the form of adhesive sheets for various applications, such as bonding objects together or fixing articles to objects. These adhesives are intended to attach objects to each other or to fix articles to objects. For example, adhesive sheets are used as reinforcing materials (reinforcing films) to impart rigidity or impact resistance to optical or electronic components constituting such devices. Patents 1 and 2 are cited as examples of this prior art.

又,近年來,能夠彎折或捲曲之攜帶型電子機器受到關注,正在推進開發一種可用於固定此種電子機器中內置之可撓性裝置(典型的是有機EL(Electroluminescence,電致發光)或液晶顯示裝置等圖像顯示裝置)等的黏著片材(專利文獻3~6)。Furthermore, in recent years, portable electronic devices that can be bent or rolled have attracted attention, and the development of an adhesive sheet for fixing flexible devices (typically organic EL (Electroluminescence) or liquid crystal display devices and other image display devices) built into such electronic devices is underway (Patents 3-6).

另一方面,著眼於黏著劑之性能,近來提出有一種黏著片材,其能夠在貼附於被黏著體之初期顯示較低之黏著力,其後使黏著力大幅地上升(專利文獻7)。根據具有此種特性之黏著片材,可於黏著力上升前發揮對於抑制黏著片材之貼錯或貼壞所導致之良率降低有用之重貼性(二次加工性),且於黏著力上升後發揮適於黏著片材原本之使用目的之強黏著性。 先前技術文獻 專利文獻 On the other hand, focusing on the performance of adhesives, a type of adhesive sheet has recently been proposed that exhibits low adhesive force initially upon attachment to the substrate, followed by a significant increase in adhesive force (Patent 7). Based on this characteristic, the adhesive sheet can provide useful re-adhesion (secondary processing capability) before the adhesive force increases, which helps to suppress yield reduction caused by mis-application or poor application of the adhesive sheet, and after the adhesive force increases, it exhibits strong adhesion suitable for the original purpose of the adhesive sheet. Previous Art Documents Patent Documents

專利文獻1:日本專利第6366199號公報 專利文獻2:日本專利第6366200號公報 專利文獻3:日本專利第6376271號公報 專利文獻4:日本專利申請公開2016-108555號公報 專利文獻5:日本專利申請公開2017-095657號公報 專利文獻6:日本專利申請公開2017-095659號公報 專利文獻7:日本專利第6373458號公報 Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 6366199 Patent Document 2: Japanese Patent No. 6366200 Patent Document 3: Japanese Patent No. 6376271 Patent Document 4: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-108555 Patent Document 5: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-095657 Patent Document 6: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-095659 Patent Document 7: Japanese Patent No. 6373458

[發明所欲解決之問題][The problem that the invention aims to solve]

補強用膜亦可用於上述可撓性裝置。例如於上述可撓性裝置之製造中,構成該裝置之構件多數情況下較薄,因此較理想為貼附黏著片材作為補強用膜進行補強,防止因裝置變形產生之不良情況,或提高操作性。由於可撓性裝置可反覆彎折或彎曲,故要求用於可撓性裝置之補強用膜具有於反覆彎曲之情形時亦正常地回復形狀之特性(彎曲回復性),且具有不會產生剝離等不良情況之特性(彎曲保持力)。此種具有彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力之補強用膜由於可用於包括可撓性裝置在內之各種用途,故適用範圍之限制較少而較為有用。Reinforcing films can also be used in the aforementioned flexible devices. For example, in the manufacture of such flexible devices, the components constituting the device are often relatively thin. Therefore, it is ideal to attach an adhesive sheet as a reinforcing film to prevent adverse conditions caused by device deformation or to improve operability. Since flexible devices can be repeatedly bent or flexed, the reinforcing film used in flexible devices is required to have the characteristic of normally recovering its shape when repeatedly bent (bending recovery) and the characteristic of not peeling or other adverse conditions (bending retention). This type of reinforcing membrane, which has bending recovery and bending retention, is more useful because it can be used in a variety of applications, including flexible devices, and therefore has fewer limitations in its scope of application.

例如,關於如專利文獻7所提出之構成為於貼附初期顯示低黏著力,其後黏著力大幅地上升的黏著劑,亦較理想為於用作補強用膜之情形時具有彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力。作為改善彎曲保持力之一方法,例如考慮適當設定黏著劑之儲存彈性模數之方法。但是,如上所述設計為黏著力上升之黏著劑若改變儲存彈性模數,則初期低黏著力及上升後黏著力兩者均會受到影響。又,除彎曲保持力以外,還要考慮彎曲回復性,滿足該等所有特性並不容易。關於在貼附初期顯示低黏著力,其後黏著力大幅地上升之黏著劑,只要可改善彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力,則於實際應用中有益。 For example, an adhesive, as proposed in Patent 7, which exhibits low adhesion initially followed by a significant increase in adhesion, would ideally possess flexural resilience and flexural retention when used as a reinforcing film. One method to improve flexural retention is to appropriately set the storage elastic modulus of the adhesive. However, as described above, if the storage elastic modulus of an adhesive designed to increase adhesion is changed, both the initial low adhesion and the subsequent increased adhesion will be affected. Furthermore, in addition to flexural retention, flexural resilience must also be considered; satisfying all these characteristics is not easy. Adhesives that exhibit low adhesion initially but subsequently increase significantly are beneficial in practical applications as long as they improve flexural resilience and flexural holding power.

本發明係鑒於上述情況而創作者,目的在於提供一種補強用膜,其能夠在貼附於被黏著體之初期顯示輕剝離性,其後使黏著力大幅地上升,且具有彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力。又,本發明之另一目的在於提供一種貼合有上述補強用膜之光學構件及電子構件。 [解決問題之技術手段] This invention was created in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, with the aim of providing a reinforcing film that exhibits easy peelability in the initial stage of attachment to an adhesive, followed by a significant increase in adhesive strength, and possesses flexural resilience and flexural holding force. Furthermore, another object of this invention is to provide an optical component and an electronic component having the aforementioned reinforcing film adhered to them. [Technical Means for Solving the Problem]

根據本說明書,可提供一種具備黏著劑層之補強用膜。上述黏著劑層包含聚合物(A)及聚合物(B)。上述聚合物(B)包含具有聚有機矽氧烷骨架之單體單元及(甲基)丙烯酸系單體單元。又,上述黏著劑層於23℃下之表面彈性模數為1~20 kPa。According to this specification, a reinforcing film having an adhesive layer is provided. The adhesive layer comprises polymer (A) and polymer (B). Polymer (B) comprises monomer units having a polysiloxane backbone and (meth)acrylate monomer units. Furthermore, the adhesive layer has a surface elastic modulus of 1–20 kPa at 23°C.

根據上述構成,黏著劑層由於包含聚合物(A)及含有具有聚有機矽氧烷骨架之單體單元之聚合物(B),故能夠在貼附於被黏著體之初期顯示輕剝離性,其後使黏著力大幅地上升。又,上述補強用膜具有彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力。具體而言,黏著劑層於23℃下之表面彈性模數(23℃表面彈性模數)為1 kPa以上的補強用膜會發揮上述黏著特性並且具有良好之彎曲回復性。又,藉由使黏著劑層之23℃表面彈性模數為20 kPa以下,會發揮上述黏著特性並且具有良好之彎曲保持力,因此即便於以反覆彎折之態樣使用之情形時,亦不易產生剝離等不良情況。Based on the above composition, the adhesive layer, containing polymer (A) and polymer (B) with monomer units having a polysiloxane backbone, exhibits slight peelability in the initial stage of adhesion to the substrate, followed by a significant increase in adhesive strength. Furthermore, the aforementioned reinforcing film possesses flexural resilience and flexural holding power. Specifically, reinforcing films with an adhesive layer having a surface elastic modulus at 23°C (surface elastic modulus at 23°C) of 1 kPa or higher exhibit the aforementioned adhesive properties and good flexural resilience. Furthermore, by setting the surface elastic modulus of the adhesive layer to below 20 kPa at 23°C, the aforementioned adhesive properties are achieved, and it also exhibits good bending retention. Therefore, even when used in a repeatedly bent manner, it is not easy to experience peeling or other adverse conditions.

此處所揭示之技術(包括補強用膜、光學構件及電子構件,以下同樣)之若干較佳態樣中,上述黏著劑層於23℃下之體積彈性模數G' 23為10~200 kPa。藉由具有該範圍之體積彈性模數G' 23之黏著劑,貼附初期之黏著力容易成為輕剝離性優異之適宜範圍。又,加工性優異,一般有容易兼顧常溫區域之應變緩和性與彎曲回復性之傾向。 In several preferred embodiments of the technologies disclosed herein (including reinforcing films, optical components, and electronic components, hereinafter the same), the volumetric elastic modulus G' 23 of the aforementioned adhesive layer at 23°C is 10–200 kPa. With an adhesive having an adhesive modulus G' 23 within this range, the initial adhesion force easily becomes a suitable range with excellent easy peelability. Furthermore, it exhibits excellent processability and generally tends to easily balance strain mitigation and flexural resilience in the room temperature range.

於若干較佳態樣中,上述黏著劑層於80℃下之體積彈性模數G' 80為5~100 kPa。具有該範圍之體積彈性模數G' 80之黏著劑一般容易兼顧彎曲回復性與彎曲保持力。例如即便於在80℃左右之高溫條件下使用之情形時,亦可具有適於彎曲回復之彈性,且具有實現彎曲保持力之接著保持力。 In several preferred embodiments, the volumetric elastic modulus G' 80 of the adhesive layer at 80°C is 5–100 kPa. Adhesives with a volumetric elastic modulus G' 80 within this range generally readily balance flexural resilience and flexural holding force. For example, even when used under high-temperature conditions around 80°C, they can exhibit suitable elasticity for flexural resilience and subsequent holding force to achieve flexural holding force.

於若干較佳態樣中,上述黏著劑層於80℃下之tanδ 80為0.10~0.60。上述tanδ 80(80℃下之損失彈性模數G'' 80/80℃下之儲存彈性模數G' 80)為0.10以上之黏著劑容易發揮適於保持彎曲之接著力。又,藉由使上述tanδ 80為0.60以下,容易抑制黏著劑之塑性變形,獲得良好之彎曲回復性。又,於將補強用膜長時間保持為彎曲狀態之情形時,亦容易發揮不會自被黏著體剝離之保持力(彎曲保持力)。 In several preferred samples, the tanδ 80 of the adhesive layer at 80°C is 0.10 to 0.60. Adhesives with a tanδ 80 (loss modulus of elasticity at 80°C G'' 80 / storage modulus of elasticity at 80°C G' 80 ) of 0.10 or higher readily exhibit adhesion forces suitable for maintaining flexibility. Furthermore, by setting the tanδ 80 to 0.60 or lower, plastic deformation of the adhesive is easily suppressed, resulting in good bending recovery. Moreover, when the reinforcing film is kept in a bent state for an extended period, it readily exhibits a holding force (bending holding force) that prevents it from peeling off from the adhered body.

上述聚合物(A)較佳為丙烯酸系聚合物。藉由包含作為丙烯酸系聚合物之聚合物(A)、及含有具有聚有機矽氧烷骨架之單體單元之聚合物(B)的黏著劑層,容易良好地實現此處所揭示之技術之效果。The polymer (A) mentioned above is preferably an acrylic polymer. The effects of the technology disclosed herein can be readily and well achieved by using an adhesive layer comprising polymer (A) as an acrylic polymer and polymer (B) containing monomer units having a polyorganosiloxane backbone.

於若干較佳態樣中,上述黏著劑層中之上述聚合物(B)之含量相對於上述聚合物(A)100重量份為0.5~5重量份。藉由將相對於聚合物(A)100重量份之聚合物(B)之量設為0.5重量份以上,容易獲得貼附初期之輕剝離性。藉由將上述聚合物(B)之量設為5重量份以下,容易實現目標之黏著力上升。又,藉由將聚合物(B)之使用量設為上述範圍,容易實現良好之彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力。In several preferred embodiments, the content of polymer (B) in the adhesive layer is 0.5 to 5 parts by weight relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A). By setting the amount of polymer (B) relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A) to 0.5 parts by weight or more, easy peeling during the initial application is readily achieved. By setting the amount of polymer (B) to 5 parts by weight or less, the target increase in adhesive force is readily achieved. Furthermore, by setting the amount of polymer (B) used within the above range, good flexural resilience and flexural holding power are readily achieved.

於若干較佳態樣中,上述黏著劑層中所含之異氰酸基與羥基之莫耳比([NCO]/[OH])為0.002~0.03。上述莫耳比([NCO]/[OH])為0.002以上之黏著劑層有彎曲回復性優異之傾向,有加工性亦優異之傾向。又,藉由將上述莫耳比([NCO]/[OH])設為0.03以下,有容易實現適宜之黏著力上升之傾向。再者,於黏著劑層中,異氰酸基與羥基可以其等之至少一部分進行化學鍵結(交聯)之狀態存在。上述黏著劑層係包含例如交聯劑者,於該構成中,上述異氰酸基例如可為交聯劑之一部份,上述羥基例如可為聚合物(A)之一部分。In several preferred embodiments, the molar ratio ([NCO]/[OH]) of the isocyanate groups to hydroxyl groups contained in the adhesive layer is 0.002 to 0.03. Adhesive layers with a molar ratio ([NCO]/[OH]) of 0.002 or higher tend to exhibit excellent flexibility and processability. Furthermore, by setting the molar ratio ([NCO]/[OH]) to 0.03 or lower, a suitable increase in adhesive force is easily achieved. Moreover, in the adhesive layer, the isocyanate groups and hydroxyl groups exist in a state where at least a portion of them are chemically bonded (cross-linked). The aforementioned adhesive layer may include, for example, a crosslinking agent. In this configuration, the aforementioned isocyanate group may be part of the crosslinking agent, and the aforementioned hydroxyl group may be part of the polymer (A).

於若干較佳態樣中,上述黏著劑層包含觸媒。又,上述黏著劑層中所含之上述觸媒與羥基之莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])為1.0×10 -6~5.0×10 -2。藉由包含相對於黏著劑層中之羥基量為規定量以上之觸媒,可抑制黏著劑層產生氣泡,而容易獲得平滑之黏著面。又,藉由使觸媒之使用量相對於黏著劑層中之羥基量為規定量以下,容易實現適宜之黏著力上升。上述觸媒更佳為鐵系觸媒,上述黏著劑層中所含之上述觸媒與羥基之莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])進而較佳為1.0×10 -4~1.0×10 -3In several preferred embodiments, the adhesive layer contains a catalyst. Furthermore, the molar ratio (catalyst/OH) of the catalyst to hydroxyl groups in the adhesive layer is 1.0 × 10⁻⁶ to 5.0 × 10⁻² . By including a catalyst at a level greater than or equal to the amount of hydroxyl groups in the adhesive layer, bubble formation in the adhesive layer can be suppressed, and a smooth adhesive surface can be easily obtained. Furthermore, by keeping the amount of catalyst used below a certain level relative to the amount of hydroxyl groups in the adhesive layer, a suitable increase in adhesive force can be easily achieved. The catalyst is preferably an iron-based catalyst, and the molar ratio ([catalyst]/[OH]) of the catalyst to the hydroxyl group contained in the adhesive layer is preferably 1.0× 10⁻⁴ to 1.0× 10⁻³ .

此處所揭示之補強用膜例如適宜作為加工或搬送偏光板、波長板等光學構件時對該光學構件賦予剛性或耐衝擊性之補強用膜。因此,根據本說明書,可提供一種貼合有此處所揭示之任一補強用膜之光學構件。The reinforcing films disclosed herein are suitable, for example, for imparting rigidity or impact resistance to optical components such as polarizing plates or wavelength plates during processing or transport. Therefore, according to this specification, an optical component with any of the reinforcing films disclosed herein can be provided.

又,此處所揭示之補強用膜例如亦適宜作為攜帶型電子機器等機器之電子構件之補強用膜。因此,根據本說明書,可提供一種貼合有此處所揭示之任一補強用膜之電子構件。Furthermore, the reinforcing films disclosed herein are also suitable as reinforcing films for electronic components of portable electronic devices and other machines. Therefore, according to this specification, an electronic component with any of the reinforcing films disclosed herein can be provided.

以下,對本發明之較佳實施方式進行說明。關於本說明書中特別言及之事項以外之實施本發明所需要之事項,業者可基於本說明書所記載之關於實施發明之指示及申請時之技術常識而理解。本發明可基於本說明書所揭示之內容及該領域之技術常識而實施。 再者,於以下圖式中,有時對發揮相同作用之構件、部位標註相同符號進行說明,有時省略或簡化重複之說明。又,圖式所記載之實施方式係為了清楚地說明本發明而模式化,未必準確地表示出實際提供之製品之尺寸或比例尺。 The preferred embodiments of this invention are described below. For matters necessary to implement this invention other than those specifically mentioned in this specification, practitioners can understand them based on the instructions for implementation contained in this specification and the technical common sense used in the application. This invention can be implemented based on the content disclosed in this specification and the technical common sense in the field. Furthermore, in the following figures, sometimes the same symbols are used to indicate components or parts that perform the same function, and sometimes repeated descriptions are omitted or simplified. Also, the embodiments shown in the figures are stylized for the purpose of clearly illustrating this invention and may not accurately represent the dimensions or scale of the actual product provided.

又,於本說明書中,「丙烯酸系聚合物」係指於聚合物結構中含有源自(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之單體單元之聚合物,典型而言係指以超過50重量%之比率含有源自(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之單體單元之聚合物。又,(甲基)丙烯酸系單體係指於1分子中具有至少一個(甲基)丙烯醯基之單體。此處,「(甲基)丙烯醯基」係包括丙烯醯基及甲基丙烯醯基之含義。因此,此處所謂(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之概念可包含具有丙烯醯基之單體(丙烯酸系單體)與具有甲基丙烯醯基之單體(甲基丙烯酸系單體)兩者。同樣地,於本說明書中,「(甲基)丙烯酸」係包括丙烯酸及甲基丙烯酸之含義,「(甲基)丙烯酸酯」係包括丙烯酸酯及甲基丙烯酸酯之含義。Furthermore, in this specification, "acrylic polymer" refers to a polymer whose polymer structure contains monomer units derived from (meth)acrylic monomers, typically referring to polymers containing monomer units derived from (meth)acrylic monomers in a ratio exceeding 50% by weight. Also, a (meth)acrylic monomer refers to a monomer having at least one (meth)acrylic group in one molecule. Here, "(meth)acrylic group" includes both acrylonitrile and methacrylic group. Therefore, the concept of (meth)acrylic monomers here can include both monomers having an acrylonitrile group (acrylic monomers) and monomers having a methacrylic group (methacrylic monomers). Similarly, in this specification, "(meth)acrylic acid" includes both acrylic acid and methacrylic acid, and "(meth)acrylate" includes both acrylate and methacrylate.

<補強用膜之結構例> 此處所揭示之補強用膜具有黏著片材之形態,該黏著片材具有由黏著劑形成之黏著面。用作補強用膜之黏著片材包含黏著劑層。此處所揭示之補強用膜可為於支持基材之單面或雙面積層有上述黏著劑層的附基材之黏著片材之形態,亦可為不具有支持基材之無基材之黏著片材之形態。以下,有時亦將支持基材簡稱為「基材」。 再者,本說明書中,「補強用膜」係指如後所述用於補強被黏著體之黏著片材(補強用黏著膜)。補強用膜例如可以無基材之黏著片材之形態於一黏著面貼附支持材等之後,將另一黏著面貼附於作為補強對象之被黏著體進行補強,因此並不限定於附基材之黏著片材之形態。就該方面而言,可理解為較具有附基材之黏著片材之形態之下述「補強膜」更廣義之概念。 <Structural Example of a Reinforcing Film> The reinforcing film disclosed herein has the form of an adhesive sheet having an adhesive surface formed by an adhesive. The adhesive sheet used as a reinforcing film comprises an adhesive layer. The reinforcing film disclosed herein may be a substrate-attached adhesive sheet having the aforementioned adhesive layer laminated on one or both sides of a supporting substrate, or it may be a substrate-free adhesive sheet without a supporting substrate. Hereinafter, the supporting substrate may sometimes be simply referred to as the "substrate". Furthermore, in this specification, "reinforcing film" refers to the adhesive sheet (reinforcing adhesive film) used to reinforce an adhered body as described below. Reinforcing films, for example, can be in the form of a substrate-free adhesive sheet. After attaching a support material to one adhesive side, the other adhesive side is attached to the adhered object for reinforcement. Therefore, they are not limited to the form of a substrate-attached adhesive sheet. In this respect, the term "reinforcing film" can be understood as a broader concept than simply having the form of a substrate-attached adhesive sheet.

將一實施方式之補強用膜之結構模式性地示於圖1。該補強用膜1係以附基材之單面黏著片材之形式構成,具備具有第一面10A及第二面10B之片狀支持基材10、以及設置於該第一面10A側之黏著劑層21。黏著劑層21固著於支持基材10之第一面10A側。補強用膜1係將黏著劑層21貼附於被黏著體而使用。如圖1所示,使用前(即貼附於被黏著體前)之補強用膜1可為附剝離襯墊之補強用膜100之構成要素,該附剝離襯墊之補強用膜100係黏著劑層21之表面(黏著面)21A抵接於至少與黏著劑層21對向之側成為剝離性表面(剝離面)之剝離襯墊31之形態。作為剝離襯墊31,例如可良好地使用藉由在片狀基材(襯墊基材)之單面設置由剝離處理劑所形成之剝離層而以該單面成為剝離面之方式構成者。或者,亦可為省略剝離襯墊31,使用第二面10B成為剝離面之支持基材10,藉由將補強用膜1進行捲繞而使黏著面21A抵接於支持基材10之第二面10B之形態(捲筒形態)。於將補強用膜1貼附於被黏著體時,將剝離襯墊31或支持基材10之第二面10B自黏著面21A剝離,並將所露出之黏著面21A壓接於被黏著體。Figure 1 schematically illustrates the structure of a reinforcing film according to one embodiment. The reinforcing film 1 is constructed as a single-sided adhesive sheet with a substrate, comprising a sheet-like support substrate 10 having a first side 10A and a second side 10B, and an adhesive layer 21 disposed on the first side 10A. The adhesive layer 21 is fixed to the first side 10A of the support substrate 10. The reinforcing film 1 is used by attaching the adhesive layer 21 to the substrate. As shown in Figure 1, the reinforcing film 1 before use (i.e. before being attached to the substrate) can be a component of the reinforcing film 100 for attaching a peelable pad. The reinforcing film 100 for attaching a peelable pad is in the form of a peelable pad 31 in which the surface (adhesive surface) 21A of the adhesive layer 21 abuts against at least the side opposite to the adhesive layer 21 to form a peelable surface (peelable surface). As a peeling pad 31, for example, it can be constructed by providing a peeling layer formed by a peeling treatment agent on one side of a sheet substrate (pad substrate), so that one side becomes the peeling surface. Alternatively, the peeling pad 31 can be omitted, and the support substrate 10 with the second side 10B as the peeling surface can be used, in which the adhesive side 21A abuts against the second side 10B of the support substrate 10 by winding the reinforcing film 1 (roll form). When attaching the reinforcing film 1 to the substrate, the second side 10B of the liner 31 or the supporting substrate 10 is peeled off from the adhesive side 21A, and the exposed adhesive side 21A is pressed onto the substrate.

將另一實施方式之補強用膜之結構模式性地示於圖2。該補強用膜2係以附基材之雙面黏著片材之形式構成,具備具有第一面10A及第二面10B之片狀支持基材10、設置於該第一面10A側之黏著劑層21、以及設置於第二面10B側之黏著劑層22。黏著劑層(第一黏著劑層)21固著於支持基材10之第一面10A,黏著劑層(第二黏著劑層)22固著於支持基材10之第二面10B。補強用膜2係將黏著劑層21、22貼附於被黏著體之不同部位而使用。貼附黏著劑層21、22之部位可為不同構件各自之部位,亦可為單一構件內之不同部位。如圖2所示,使用前之補強用膜2可為附剝離襯墊之補強用膜200之構成要素,該附剝離襯墊之補強用膜200係黏著劑層21之表面(第一黏著面)21A及黏著劑層22之表面(第二黏著面)22A抵接於至少與黏著劑層21、22對向之側分別成為剝離面之剝離襯墊31、32之形態。作為剝離襯墊31、32,例如可良好地使用藉由在片狀基材(襯墊基材)之單面設置由剝離處理劑所形成之剝離層而以該單面成為剝離面之方式構成者。或者,亦可省略剝離襯墊32,使用雙面成為剝離面之剝離襯墊31,藉由將其與補強用膜2重疊並捲繞成漩渦狀而構成第二黏著面22A抵接於剝離襯墊31之背面之形態(捲筒形態)的附剝離襯墊之補強用膜。Figure 2 schematically illustrates the structure of another embodiment of the reinforcing film. The reinforcing film 2 is constructed as a double-sided adhesive sheet attached to a substrate, comprising a sheet-like support substrate 10 having a first side 10A and a second side 10B, an adhesive layer 21 disposed on the first side 10A, and an adhesive layer 22 disposed on the second side 10B. The adhesive layer (first adhesive layer) 21 is fixed to the first side 10A of the support substrate 10, and the adhesive layer (second adhesive layer) 22 is fixed to the second side 10B of the support substrate 10. The reinforcing film 2 is used by attaching the adhesive layers 21 and 22 to different parts of the adhered object. The adhesive layers 21 and 22 can be attached to different parts of different components or different parts within a single component. As shown in Figure 2, the reinforcing film 2 before use can be a component of the reinforcing film 200 with a peelable liner. The reinforcing film 200 with a peelable liner has the adhesive layer 21 surface (first adhesive surface) 21A and the adhesive layer 22 surface (second adhesive surface) 22A abutting against the peelable liner 31 and 32, which are at least peelable surfaces on the sides opposite to the adhesive layers 21 and 22. As peeling pads 31 and 32, for example, a peeling layer formed by a peeling treatment agent can be provided on one side of a sheet substrate (pad substrate) so that the one side becomes the peeling surface. Alternatively, the peeling pad 32 can be omitted, and a peeling pad 31 with peeling surfaces on both sides can be used. This is achieved by overlapping it with the reinforcing film 2 and winding it into a vortex shape to form a second adhesive surface 22A that abuts against the back of the peeling pad 31 (roll shape).

將又一實施方式之補強用膜之結構模式性地示於圖3。該補強用膜3係以由黏著劑層21構成之無基材之雙面黏著片材之形式構成。補強用膜3係將包含黏著劑層21之一表面(第一面)之第一黏著面21A、與包含黏著劑層21之另一表面(第二面)之第二黏著面21B貼附於被黏著體之不同部位而使用。如圖3所示,使用前之補強用膜3可為附剝離襯墊之補強用膜300之構成要素,該附剝離襯墊之補強用膜300係第一黏著面21A及第二黏著面)21B抵接於至少與黏著劑層21對向之側分別成為剝離面之剝離襯墊31、32之形態。或者,亦可省略剝離襯墊32,使用雙面成為剝離面之剝離襯墊31,藉由將其與補強用膜3重疊並捲繞成漩渦狀而構成第二黏著面21B抵接於剝離襯墊31之背面之形態(捲筒形態)的附剝離襯墊之補強用膜。Figure 3 schematically illustrates the structure of another embodiment of the reinforcing film. The reinforcing film 3 is constructed as a substrate-free double-sided adhesive sheet consisting of an adhesive layer 21. The reinforcing film 3 is used by attaching a first adhesive surface 21A containing one surface (first surface) of the adhesive layer 21 and a second adhesive surface 21B containing the other surface (second surface) of the adhesive layer 21 to different parts of the adhered body. As shown in Figure 3, the reinforcing film 3 before use can be a component of the reinforcing film 300 with a peelable liner. The reinforcing film 300 with a peelable liner is in the form of a first adhesive surface 21A and a second adhesive surface 21B abutting against peelable liner 31 and 32, which are peelable surfaces respectively on the side opposite to the adhesive layer 21. Alternatively, the peeling pad 32 can be omitted, and a peeling pad 31 with both sides as peeling surfaces can be used. The peeling pad 31 is formed by overlapping it with the reinforcing film 3 and rolling it into a vortex shape to form a second adhesive surface 21B that abuts against the back of the peeling pad 31 (roll shape).

再者,補強用膜可為捲筒形態,可為單片形態,亦可為根據用途或使用態樣而切斷、沖切加工成適當形狀等之形態。此處所揭示之技術中之黏著劑層典型的是連續形成,但並不限定於此,例如亦可形成為點狀、條狀等規則或無規之圖案。Furthermore, the reinforcing film can be in roll form, in sheet form, or cut and punched into appropriate shapes according to its application or usage. The adhesive layer in the technology disclosed here is typically formed continuously, but is not limited to this; for example, it can also be formed into regular or irregular patterns such as dots or stripes.

<黏著劑層> 此處所揭示之補強用膜具備包含聚合物(A)及聚合物(B)之黏著劑層。此種黏著劑層可由黏著劑組成物形成,該黏著劑組成物含有作為單體原料A之完全聚合物或部分聚合物的聚合物(A)、及聚合物(B)。黏著劑組合物之形態並無特別限制,例如可為溶劑型、水分散型、熱熔型、活性能量線硬化型(例如光硬化型)等各種形態。 <Adhesive Layer> The reinforcing film disclosed herein has an adhesive layer comprising polymer (A) and polymer (B). This adhesive layer can be formed from an adhesive composition containing polymer (A) as a complete or partial polymer of monomer raw material A, and polymer (B). The morphology of the adhesive composition is not particularly limited, and it can be various forms, such as solvent-based, water-dispersible, hot-melt, or active energy line-curing (e.g., photocuring).

(23℃表面彈性模數) 此處所揭示之黏著劑層之特徵在於,其表面(黏著面)於23℃下之表面彈性模數(23℃表面彈性模數)在1~20 kPa之範圍內。藉由使上述23℃表面彈性模數為1 kPa以上,可實現基於含有聚合物(A)及聚合物(B)之黏著特性,並且具有良好之彎曲回復性。又,藉由使上述表面彈性模數為20 kPa以下,可實現上述黏著特性,並且發揮良好之彎曲保持力。 (Surface Elastic Modulus at 23°C) The adhesive layer disclosed herein is characterized by its surface elastic modulus (23°C surface elastic modulus) being in the range of 1–20 kPa at 23°C. By achieving a surface elastic modulus at 23°C of 1 kPa or higher, adhesive properties based on polymers (A) and (B) can be achieved, along with good flexural resilience. Furthermore, by achieving a surface elastic modulus of 20 kPa or lower, the aforementioned adhesive properties can be achieved, along with good flexural holding power.

就提高彎曲回復性之觀點而言,上述23℃表面彈性模數較佳為2 kPa以上,更佳為3 kPa以上,進而較佳為4 kPa以上(例如5 kPa以上),可為8 kPa以上,可為10 kPa以上,亦可為12 kPa以上(例如14 kPa以上)。呈現上述表面彈性模數越高,則初期輕剝離性越優異之傾向。又,就兼顧良好之彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力並且良好地表現黏著力上升之觀點而言,上述23℃表面彈性模數適宜為15 kPa以下,較佳為12 kPa以下,更佳為9 kPa以下,進而較佳為7 kPa以下(例如6 kPa以下),亦可為4 kPa以下。From the perspective of improving flexural resilience, the aforementioned surface elastic modulus at 23°C is preferably 2 kPa or higher, more preferably 3 kPa or higher, and even more preferably 4 kPa or higher (e.g., 5 kPa or higher), and can be 8 kPa or higher, 10 kPa or higher, or 12 kPa or higher (e.g., 14 kPa or higher). A higher surface elastic modulus tends to result in better initial easy peeling. Furthermore, from the perspective of balancing good flexural resilience and flexural holding force while also demonstrating a good increase in adhesive force, the aforementioned surface elastic modulus at 23°C is preferably 15 kPa or lower, preferably 12 kPa or lower, more preferably 9 kPa or lower, and even more preferably 7 kPa or lower (e.g., 6 kPa or lower), and can also be 4 kPa or lower.

黏著劑層之23℃表面彈性模數可藉由聚合物(A)之種類或特性(分子量或玻璃轉移溫度、分子結構等)、聚合物(B)之種類(化學結構等)或特性(分子量或玻璃轉移溫度等)、使用量、交聯劑之種類或使用量等進行調節。黏著劑層之23℃表面彈性模數係藉由下述實施例所記載之方法進行測定。The surface elastic modulus at 23°C of the adhesive layer can be adjusted by the type or properties of polymer (A) (molecular weight or glass transition temperature, molecular structure, etc.), the type or properties of polymer (B) (chemical structure, etc.) (molecular weight or glass transition temperature, etc.), the amount used, and the type or amount of crosslinking agent. The surface elastic modulus at 23°C of the adhesive layer was determined by the method described in the following embodiment.

(23℃體積彈性模數G' 23) 黏著劑層於23℃下之體積彈性模數G' 23(23℃體積彈性模數G' 23)可於滿足上述23℃表面彈性模數之範圍之範圍內適當設定,並不限定於特定範圍。於若干態樣中,黏著劑層之23℃體積彈性模數G' 23適宜設為10 kPa以上。藉由將上述體積彈性模數G' 23設為規定值以上,貼附初期之黏著力容易成為輕剝離性優異之適宜範圍。又,加工性優異,一般有常溫區域之彎曲回復性亦優異之傾向。上述體積彈性模數G' 23較佳為15 kPa以上,更佳為20 kPa以上,進而較佳為25 kPa以上,尤佳為30 kPa以上。於其他若干態樣中,上述體積彈性模數G' 23可為50 kPa以上,可為80 kPa以上,亦可為100 kPa以上。 (Volume Elastic Modulus G' 23 at 23°C) The volume elastic modulus G' 23 of the adhesive layer at 23°C can be appropriately set within a range that satisfies the aforementioned surface elastic modulus at 23°C, and is not limited to a specific range. In several samples, the volume elastic modulus G' 23 of the adhesive layer at 23°C is preferably set to 10 kPa or higher. By setting the aforementioned volume elastic modulus G' 23 to a specified value or higher, the initial adhesion force easily becomes a suitable range with excellent easy peeling properties. Furthermore, it exhibits excellent processability and generally tends to have excellent flexural recovery in the room temperature range. The aforementioned volumetric elastic modulus G' 23 is preferably 15 kPa or more, more preferably 20 kPa or more, further preferably 25 kPa or more, and even more preferably 30 kPa or more. In several other cases, the aforementioned volumetric elastic modulus G' 23 may be 50 kPa or more, 80 kPa or more, or 100 kPa or more.

於若干態樣中,黏著劑層之23℃體積彈性模數G' 23適宜設為200 kPa以下。上述體積彈性模數G' 23為規定值以下之黏著劑一般有常溫區域之應變緩和性優異之傾向,又,容易表現黏著力上升。上述體積彈性模數G' 23較佳為150 kPa以下,更佳為90 kPa以下。於若干較佳態樣中,上述體積彈性模數G' 23可為60 kPa以下,亦可為40 kPa以下(例如35 kPa以下)。 In several samples, the volumetric elastic modulus G' 23 at 23°C is preferably set to 200 kPa or less. Adhesives with a volumetric elastic modulus G' 23 below the specified value generally exhibit excellent strain mitigation in the room temperature range and tend to show an increase in adhesive force. The volumetric elastic modulus G' 23 is preferably 150 kPa or less, more preferably 90 kPa or less. In several preferred samples, the volumetric elastic modulus G' 23 may be 60 kPa or less, or may be 40 kPa or less (e.g., 35 kPa or less).

(80℃體積彈性模數G' 80) 黏著劑層於80℃下之體積彈性模數G' 80(80℃體積彈性模數G' 80)係於滿足上述23℃表面彈性模數之範圍之範圍內適當設定,並不限定於特定範圍。於若干態樣中,黏著劑層之80℃體積彈性模數G' 80較佳為5 kPa以上。藉由將上述體積彈性模數G' 80設為規定值以上,一般容易提昇彎曲回復性,即便於高溫條件下使用之情形時,亦可具有適於彎曲回復之彈性。於若干較佳態樣中,上述體積彈性模數G' 80可為7 kPa以上,可為9 kPa以上,亦可為10 kPa以上。於其他若干態樣中,上述體積彈性模數G' 80可為15 kPa以上,可為30 kPa以上,亦可為50 kPa以上。 (80°C Volumetric Elastic Modulus G' 80 ) The volumetric elastic modulus G' 80 of the adhesive layer at 80°C is appropriately set within the range that satisfies the above-mentioned surface elastic modulus at 23°C, and is not limited to a specific range. In several samples, the 80°C volumetric elastic modulus G' 80 of the adhesive layer is preferably 5 kPa or higher. By setting the above-mentioned volumetric elastic modulus G' 80 to a specified value or higher, flexural resilience is generally easily improved, and even when used under high-temperature conditions, it can have elasticity suitable for flexural resilience. In several preferred states, the volumetric elastic modulus G' 80 may be 7 kPa or more, 9 kPa or more, or 10 kPa or more. In several other states, the volumetric elastic modulus G' 80 may be 15 kPa or more, 30 kPa or more, or 50 kPa or more.

於若干態樣中,黏著劑層之80℃體積彈性模數G' 80適宜設為100 kPa以下。藉由將上述體積彈性模數G' 80限制為規定值以下,一般容易獲得良好之彎曲保持力,容易兼顧彎曲回復性與彎曲保持力。例如可於包括高溫條件之各種環境下,具有適於彎曲回復之彈性,具有實現彎曲保持力之接著保持力。上述體積彈性模數G' 80較佳為90 kPa以下,更佳為60 kPa以下。於若干態樣中,上述體積彈性模數G' 80可為20 kPa以下,可為16 kPa以下,亦可為14 kPa以下(例如12 kPa以下)。 In several samples, the volumetric elastic modulus G' 80 at 80°C is preferably set to 100 kPa or less. By limiting the aforementioned volumetric elastic modulus G' 80 to a specified value or less, good flexural holding force is generally easily obtained, and flexural recovery and flexural holding force are easily balanced. For example, it can have elasticity suitable for flexural recovery and subsequent holding force to achieve flexural holding force in various environments, including high-temperature conditions. The aforementioned volumetric elastic modulus G' 80 is preferably 90 kPa or less, and more preferably 60 kPa or less. In several cases, the volumetric elastic modulus G' 80 may be less than 20 kPa, less than 16 kPa, or less than 14 kPa (e.g., less than 12 kPa).

(80℃tanδ 80) 黏著劑層於80℃下之tanδ 80(80℃tanδ 80)係於滿足上述23℃表面彈性模數之範圍之範圍內適當設定,並不限定於特定範圍。於若干態樣中,黏著劑層之80℃tanδ 80適宜設為0.10以上。上述tanδ 80越高,則黏著劑越容易發揮適於彎曲保持之接著力。上述tanδ 80較佳為0.20以上。於若干較佳態樣中,上述tanδ 80可為0.30以上,可為0.40以上,亦可為0.45以上。 The tanδ 80 of the adhesive layer at 80 ° C is appropriately set within a range that satisfies the surface elastic modulus at 23°C mentioned above, and is not limited to a specific range. In several samples, the tanδ 80 of the adhesive layer at 80°C is preferably set to 0.10 or higher. The higher the tanδ 80 , the easier it is for the adhesive to exert adhesion suitable for flexural retention. The tanδ 80 is preferably 0.20 or higher. In several preferred samples, the tanδ 80 may be 0.30 or higher, 0.40 or higher, or 0.45 or higher.

於若干態樣中,黏著劑層之80℃tanδ 80較佳為0.60以下。藉由使上述tanδ 80為0.60以下,可抑制黏著劑之塑性變形,容易獲得良好之彎曲回復性。又,於將補強用膜長時間保持為彎曲狀態之情形時,亦容易發揮不會自被黏著體發生剝離之保持力。進而,黏著力上升亦容易成為適宜範圍。上述80℃tanδ 80可為0.55以下。於其他若干態樣中,上述80℃tanδ 80可為0.50以下,亦可為0.35以下。 In several samples, the tanδ 80 at 80°C is preferably 0.60 or less for the adhesive layer. By keeping the tanδ 80 below 0.60, plastic deformation of the adhesive can be suppressed, and good bending recovery can be easily obtained. Furthermore, when the reinforcing film is kept in a bent state for a long time, it is easier to maintain its holding force and prevent it from peeling off from the adherend. Consequently, an increase in adhesive force can easily become within a suitable range. The aforementioned tanδ 80 at 80°C can be 0.55 or less. In other samples, the aforementioned tanδ 80 at 80°C can be 0.50 or less, or 0.35 or less.

黏著劑層之23℃體積彈性模數G' 23、80℃體積彈性模數G' 80及80℃tanδ 80可藉由聚合物(A)之種類或特性(分子量或玻璃轉移溫度、分子結構等)、聚合物(B)之種類(化學結構等)或特性(分子量或玻璃轉移溫度等)、使用量、交聯劑之種類或使用量等進行調節。黏著劑層之23℃體積彈性模數G' 23、80℃體積彈性模數G' 80及80℃tanδ 80係藉由下述實施例所記載之方法進行測定。 The volumetric elastic modulus G'23 at 23°C, the volumetric elastic modulus G'80 at 80°C, and the tanδ 80 at 80°C of the adhesive layer can be adjusted by the type or properties of polymer (A) (molecular weight or glass transition temperature, molecular structure, etc.), the type or properties of polymer (B) (chemical structure, etc.) (molecular weight or glass transition temperature, etc.), the amount used, and the type or amount of crosslinking agent. The volumetric elastic modulus G'23 at 23°C, the volumetric elastic modulus G'80 at 80°C, and the tanδ 80 at 80°C of the adhesive layer are determined by the method described in the following embodiments.

(聚合物(A)) 作為聚合物(A),可使用黏著劑領域公知之丙烯酸系聚合物、橡膠系聚合物、聚酯系聚合物、胺基甲酸酯系聚合物、聚醚系聚合物、聚矽氧系聚合物、聚醯胺系聚合物、氟系聚合物等在室溫區域顯示橡膠彈性之各種聚合物之一種或兩種以上。此處所揭示之補強用膜中,聚合物(A)典型的是黏著劑層中所含之聚合物成分之主成分、即佔據超過50重量%之成分,例如可為上述聚合物成分中佔據75重量%以上之成分。於若干態樣中,上述聚合物(A)係佔據超過黏著劑層整體之50重量%之成分,可為佔據70重量%以上之成分,可為佔據80重量%以上之成分,可為佔據90重量%以上之成分,亦可為佔據95重量%以上(例如97重量%以上)之成分。 (Polymer (A)) As polymer (A), one or more of various polymers known in the adhesive field that exhibit rubber elasticity in the room temperature range, such as acrylic polymers, rubber polymers, polyester polymers, urethane polymers, polyether polymers, polysiloxane polymers, polyamide polymers, and fluoropolymers, can be used. In the reinforcing film disclosed herein, polymer (A) is typically the main component of the polymer composition contained in the adhesive layer, that is, the component accounting for more than 50% by weight, for example, the component accounting for more than 75% by weight of the aforementioned polymer composition. In several embodiments, the polymer (A) comprises more than 50% by weight of the total adhesive layer, and may comprise more than 70% by weight, more than 80% by weight, more than 90% by weight, or more than 95% by weight (e.g., more than 97% by weight).

聚合物(A)之玻璃轉移溫度T A並無特別限定,可以於此處所揭示之補強用膜中獲得較佳特性之方式進行選擇。於若干態樣中,可良好地採用T A未達0℃之聚合物(A)。包含此種聚合物(A)之黏著劑由於顯示出適度之流動性(例如該黏著劑中所含之聚合物鏈之運動性),故適於實現藉由加熱使黏著力上升至規定值以上之補強用膜。此處所揭示之補強用膜可使用T A未達-10℃、未達-20℃、未達-30℃或未達-35℃之聚合物(A)良好地實施。於若干態樣中,T A可未達-40℃,亦可未達-50℃。於若干較佳態樣中,T A為-55℃以下,更佳為-58℃以下,進而較佳為-62℃以下,亦可為-65℃以下(例如-66℃以下)。T A之下限並無特別限制。就材料之獲取容易性或提高黏著劑層之凝聚力之觀點而言,通常可良好地採用T A為-80℃以上、-70℃以上之聚合物(A)。於若干態樣中,T A例如可為-63℃以上,可為-55℃以上,可為-50℃以上,亦可為-45℃以上。 The glass transition temperature TA of polymer (A) is not particularly limited and can be selected in a manner that yields better properties in the reinforcing film disclosed herein. In several embodiments, polymer (A) with TA not reaching 0°C is readily used. Adhesives containing such polymer (A) exhibit suitable flowability (e.g., the movement of polymer chains contained in the adhesive), making them suitable for realizing reinforcing films where the adhesive force increases above a specified value upon heating. The reinforcing film disclosed herein can be readily implemented using polymers (A) with TA not reaching -10°C, -20°C, -30°C, or -35°C. In several embodiments, TA may not reach -40°C or -50°C. In several preferred states, TA is below -55°C, more preferably below -58°C, even more preferably below -62°C, and can also be below -65°C (e.g., below -66°C). There is no particular limitation on the lower limit of TA . From the viewpoint of material availability or improving the cohesiveness of the adhesive layer, polymers (A) with TA of -80°C or higher, or -70°C or higher, are generally preferred. In several states, TA can, for example, be above -63°C, above -55°C, above -50°C, or above -45°C.

此處,本說明書中,聚合物之玻璃轉移溫度(Tg)(例如聚合物(A)、下述聚合物(B)等之玻璃轉移溫度)係指文獻或目錄等所記載之標稱值、或基於用於製備該聚合物之單體原料之組成根據Fox之式所求出之Tg。Fox式係指如下所示,共聚物之Tg與使構成該共聚物之單體各者均聚所獲得之均聚物之玻璃轉移溫度Tgi之關係式。 1/Tg=Σ(Wi/Tgi) 於上述Fox之式中,Tg表示共聚物之玻璃轉移溫度(單位:K),Wi表示該共聚物中之單體i之重量分率(重量基準之共聚比率),Tgi表示單體i之均聚物之玻璃轉移溫度(單位:K)。於Tg特定之對象聚合物為均聚物之情形時,該均聚物之Tg與對象聚合物之Tg一致。 In this specification, the glass transition temperature (Tg) of a polymer (e.g., the glass transition temperature of polymer (A), polymer (B) below, etc.) refers to the nominal value recorded in literature or catalogues, or the Tg calculated according to Fox's formula based on the composition of the monomer raw materials used to prepare the polymer. Fox's formula is the relationship between the Tg of the copolymer and the glass transition temperature Tgi of the homopolymer obtained by homopolymerization of the monomers constituting the copolymer, as shown below. 1/Tg=Σ(Wi/Tgi) In the above Fox's formula, Tg represents the glass transition temperature of the copolymer (unit: K), Wi represents the weight fraction of monomer i in the copolymer (weight-based copolymerization ratio), and Tgi represents the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer of monomer i (unit: K). When the target polymer with a specific Tg is a homopolymer, the Tg of the homopolymer is the same as that of the target polymer.

作為用於算出Tg之均聚物之玻璃轉移溫度,使用公知資料所記載之值。具體而言,可例舉「聚合物手冊」(第3版,John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1989年)中之數值。關於上述聚合物手冊中記載有複數種值之單體,採用最高值。As the glass transition temperature (Tg) of homopolymers used to calculate the glass transition temperature, values recorded in known sources are used. Specifically, values from the "Polymer Handbook" (3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1989) can be cited as examples. For monomers for which multiple values are recorded in the aforementioned Polymer Handbook, the highest value is used.

作為上述聚合物手冊中無記載之單體之均聚物之玻璃轉移溫度,使用藉由以下測定方法所獲得之值。 具體而言,於具備溫度計、攪拌機、氮氣導入管及回流冷凝管之反應器中投入單體100重量份、2,2'-偶氮二異丁腈0.2重量份及作為聚合溶劑之乙酸乙酯200重量份,一面使氮氣流通一面攪拌1小時。於以此方式去除聚合系內之氧後,升溫至63℃,並使其反應10小時。繼而,冷卻至室溫,獲得固形物成分濃度33重量%之均聚物溶液。繼而,將該均聚物溶液流延塗佈於剝離襯墊上並進行乾燥而製作厚度約2 mm之試驗樣品(片狀之均聚物)。將該試驗樣品沖切為直徑7.9 mm之圓盤狀並夾入至平行板之間,一面使用黏彈性試驗機(TA Instruments Japan公司製造,機種名「ARES」)賦予頻率1 Hz之剪切應變,一面於溫度區域-70℃~150℃以5℃/分鐘之升溫速度藉由剪切模式測定黏彈性,將相當於tanδ之峰頂溫度之溫度設為均聚物之Tg。 The glass transition temperature of the homopolymer of monomers not recorded in the aforementioned polymer manual was determined using the value obtained by the following method. Specifically, 100 parts by weight of the monomer, 0.2 parts by weight of 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile, and 200 parts by weight of ethyl acetate as the polymerization solvent were added to a reactor equipped with a thermometer, a stirrer, a nitrogen inlet, and a reflux condenser. The mixture was stirred for 1 hour while nitrogen was flowing through it. After removing oxygen from the polymerization system in this manner, the temperature was raised to 63°C and the reaction was allowed to proceed for 10 hours. Subsequently, the mixture was cooled to room temperature to obtain a homopolymer solution with a solid content of 33% by weight. Next, the homopolymer solution was cast onto a release liner and dried to prepare a test sample (sheet-like homopolymer) approximately 2 mm thick. This test sample was punched into a disc shape with a diameter of 7.9 mm and sandwiched between parallel plates. While applying a shear strain at a frequency of 1 Hz using a viscoelasticity testing machine (manufactured by TA Instruments Japan, model "ARES"), the viscoelasticity was measured in shear mode within the temperature range of -70°C to 150°C at a heating rate of 5°C/min. The temperature corresponding to the peak temperature of tanδ was set as the Tg of the homopolymer.

聚合物(A)之重量平均分子量(Mw)通常適宜為約20×10 4以上,但並無特別限定。藉由該Mw之聚合物(A),容易獲得顯示良好凝聚性之黏著劑。就獲得更高凝聚力之觀點而言,於若干較佳態樣中,聚合物(A)之Mw例如可為30×10 4以上,可為40×10 4以上,可為50×10 4以上,可為60×10 4以上,亦可為80×10 4以上。又,聚合物(A)之Mw通常適宜為約500×10 4以下。該Mw之聚合物(A)由於容易形成顯示適度流動性(聚合物鏈之運動性)之黏著劑,故適於實現貼附初期之黏著力較低且黏著力上升較大之補強用膜。聚合物(A)之Mw不過高就提高與聚合物(B)之相容性之觀點而言亦較佳。於若干較佳態樣中,聚合物(A)之Mw例如可為250×10 4以下,可為200×10 4以下,可為150×10 4以下,可為100×10 4以下,亦可為70×10 4以下。 The weight-average molecular weight (Mw) of polymer (A) is typically preferably above about 20 × 10⁴ , but is not particularly limited. With polymer (A) of this Mw, it is easy to obtain an adhesive exhibiting good cohesiveness. From the viewpoint of obtaining even higher cohesiveness, in several preferred embodiments, the Mw of polymer (A) can be, for example, above 30 × 10⁴ , above 40 × 10⁴ , above 50 × 10⁴ , above 60 × 10⁴ , or above 80 × 10⁴ . Furthermore, the Mw of polymer (A) is typically preferably below about 500 × 10⁴ . Polymer (A) with this Mw readily forms an adhesive exhibiting moderate fluidity (mobility of the polymer chain), thus it is suitable for achieving reinforcing films with lower initial adhesion and greater adhesion rise. From the viewpoint of improving compatibility with polymer (B), it is also preferable that the Mw of polymer (A) is not too high. Among several preferred embodiments, the Mw of polymer (A) may be, for example, 250 × 10⁴ or less, 200 × 10⁴ or less, 150 × 10⁴ or less, 100 × 10⁴ or less, or 70 × 10⁴ or less.

再者,本說明書中,聚合物(A)及下述聚合物(B)之Mw可藉由凝膠滲透層析法(GPC)進行聚苯乙烯換算而求出。更具體而言,可依據下述實施例中所記載之方法及條件而測定Mw。Furthermore, in this specification, the Mw of polymer (A) and polymer (B) described below can be determined by polystyrene conversion using gel osmosis chromatography (GPC). More specifically, Mw can be determined according to the methods and conditions described in the following embodiments.

作為此處所揭示之補強用膜中之聚合物(A),可良好地採用丙烯酸系聚合物。若使用丙烯酸系聚合物作為聚合物(A),則有容易獲得與聚合物(B)之良好之相容性之傾向。聚合物(A)與聚合物(B)之相容性良好時,可藉由提高黏著劑層內之聚合物(B)之移動性而有助於降低初期黏著力及提高加熱後黏著力,故較佳。又,分子設計自由度較高之丙烯酸系聚合物適宜作為可均衡地改善黏著特性、彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力之黏著劑材料。As the polymer (A) in the reinforcing film disclosed herein, acrylic polymers are well-suited. Using an acrylic polymer as polymer (A) tends to readily achieve good compatibility with polymer (B). Good compatibility between polymer (A) and polymer (B) helps reduce initial adhesive force and increase post-heating adhesive force by improving the mobility of polymer (B) within the adhesive layer, which is therefore preferable. Furthermore, acrylic polymers, with their higher degree of molecular design freedom, are suitable as adhesive materials that can comprehensively improve adhesive properties, flexural resilience, and flexural holding power.

丙烯酸系聚合物例如可為含有50重量%以上之源自(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯之單體單元之聚合物、即用以製備該丙烯酸系聚合物之單體成分(單體原料A)總量中之50重量%以上為(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯之聚合物。作為(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯,可良好地使用具有碳數1~20之(即,C 1-20之)直鏈或支鏈狀之烷基之(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯。就容易獲得特性之平衡之方面而言,單體原料A中之(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-20烷基酯之比率例如可為50重量%以上,亦可為60重量%以上。於若干較佳態樣中,單體原料A中之(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-20烷基酯之比率為70重量%以上,更佳為80重量%以上,進而較佳為85重量%以上,尤佳為90重量%以上。藉由使用該單體組成之丙烯酸系聚合物,容易獲得均衡地兼顧黏著力上升與彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力之黏著劑。又,單體原料A中之(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-20烷基酯之比率例如可為99.9重量%以下,可為98重量%以下,亦可為95重量%以下。於若干態樣中,單體原料A中之(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-20烷基酯之比率例如可為90重量%以下,可為85重量%以下,亦可為80重量%以下。 Acrylic polymers can be, for example, polymers containing 50% by weight or more of monomer units derived from alkyl methacrylates, that is, polymers in which 50% by weight or more of the total monomer components (monomer raw material A) used to prepare the acrylic polymer are alkyl methacrylates. Alkyl methacrylates having 1 to 20 carbon atoms (i.e., C1-20 ) in a straight-chain or branched-chain manner are preferred as alkyl methacrylates. In terms of easily obtaining a balance of properties, the ratio of C1-20 alkyl methacrylates in monomer raw material A can be, for example, 50% by weight or more, or 60% by weight or more. In several preferred embodiments, the ratio of C1-20 alkyl methacrylates in monomer raw material A is 70% by weight or more, more preferably 80% by weight or more, further preferably 85% by weight or more, and most preferably 90% by weight or more. By using acrylic polymers composed of this monomer, adhesives that balance adhesive strength increase, flexural resilience, and flexural retention can be easily obtained. Furthermore, the proportion of (meth)acrylate C1-20 alkyl esters in monomer raw material A can be, for example, 99.9% by weight or less, 98% by weight or less, or 95% by weight or less. In several embodiments, the proportion of (meth)acrylate C1-20 alkyl esters in monomer raw material A can be, for example, 90% by weight or less, 85% by weight or less, or 80% by weight or less.

作為(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-20烷基酯之非限定具體例,可例舉:(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第二丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第三丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、(甲基)丙烯酸辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十二烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十三烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十四烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十五烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十六烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十七烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸硬脂酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異硬脂酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十九烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二十烷基酯等。 Examples of non-limiting C1-20 alkyl esters of (meth)acrylate include: methyl methacrylate, ethyl methacrylate, propyl methacrylate, isopropyl methacrylate, n-butyl methacrylate, isobutyl methacrylate, dibutyl methacrylate, terbutyl methacrylate, amyl methacrylate, isoamyl methacrylate, hexyl methacrylate, heptyl methacrylate, octyl methacrylate, 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate, isooctyl methacrylate. Nonyl methacrylate, isononyl methacrylate, decyl methacrylate, isodecanyl methacrylate, undecyl methacrylate, dodecyl methacrylate, tridecyl methacrylate, tetradecyl methacrylate, pentadecyl methacrylate, hexadecyl methacrylate, heptadecanyl methacrylate, stearyl methacrylate, isostearyl methacrylate, nonadecanyl methacrylate, eicosyl methacrylate, etc.

於該等中,較佳為至少使用(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-18烷基酯,更佳為至少使用(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-14烷基酯。於若干態樣中,丙烯酸系聚合物可含有選自(甲基)丙烯酸C 4-12烷基酯(較佳為丙烯酸C 4-10烷基酯,例如丙烯酸C 6-10烷基酯)中之至少一種作為單體單元。例如較佳為含有丙烯酸正丁酯(BA)及丙烯酸2-乙基己酯(2EHA)之一者或兩者之丙烯酸系聚合物,尤佳為至少含有2EHA之丙烯酸系聚合物。 In these embodiments, it is preferred to use at least C1-18 alkyl esters of (meth)acrylate, more preferably at least C1-14 alkyl esters of (meth)acrylate. In several embodiments, the acrylic polymer may contain at least one of C4-12 alkyl esters of (meth)acrylate (preferably C4-10 alkyl esters of acrylate, such as C6-10 alkyl esters of acrylate) as a monomer unit. For example, it is preferred to use an acrylic polymer containing one or both of n-butyl acrylate (BA) and 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA), and even more preferably an acrylic polymer containing at least 2EHA.

於若干較佳態樣中,用以製備丙烯酸系聚合物之單體原料A中之丙烯酸C 6-10烷基酯(適宜為丙烯酸C 8-9烷基酯,典型的是2EHA)之比率為70重量%以上,更佳為80重量%以上,進而較佳為85重量%以上,尤佳為90重量%以上。該單體組成之丙烯酸系聚合物尤其適宜實現此處所揭示之技術之效果。又,單體原料A中之丙烯酸C 6-10烷基酯(適宜為丙烯酸C 8-9烷基酯,典型的是2EHA)之比率例如可為99.9重量%以下,就初期低黏著力、彎曲回復性等觀點而言,可為98重量%以下,亦可為95重量%以下。 In several preferred embodiments, the proportion of C6-10 alkyl acrylate (suitably C8-9 alkyl acrylate, typically 2EHA) in monomer raw material A used to prepare acrylic polymers is 70% by weight or more, more preferably 80% by weight or more, further preferably 85% by weight or more, and even more preferably 90% by weight or more. Acrylic polymers composed of this monomer are particularly suitable for achieving the effects of the technology disclosed herein. Furthermore, the proportion of C6-10 alkyl acrylate (suitably C8-9 alkyl acrylate, typically 2EHA) in monomer raw material A can be, for example, 99.9% by weight or less, and from the viewpoints of initial low adhesion and flexural resilience, it can be 98% by weight or less, or even 95% by weight or less.

又,於若干較佳態樣中,用以製備丙烯酸系聚合物之單體原料A中,較佳為限制(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-3烷基酯(例如(甲基)丙烯酸C 1烷基酯,典型的是甲基丙烯酸甲酯(MMA))之比率。(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-3烷基酯(例如(甲基)丙烯酸C 1烷基酯,典型的是MMA)有Tg相對較高之傾向,包含使用上述單體成分之丙烯酸系聚合物的黏著劑之凝聚性容易變高。藉由限制(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-3烷基酯之使用量,可適度降低黏著劑之凝聚力,良好地實現適於兼顧彎曲保持力或黏著力上升之彈性模數(典型的是表面彈性模數)。就此種觀點而言,上述單體原料A中(甲基)丙烯酸C 1-3烷基酯(例如(甲基)丙烯酸C 1烷基酯,典型的是MMA)之比率適宜設為8重量%以下,較佳為6重量%以下,更佳為3重量%以下,進而較佳為1重量%以下(例如0~0.3重量%)。 Furthermore, in several preferred embodiments, the proportion of (meth)acrylate C1-3 alkyl esters (e.g., (meth)acrylate C1 alkyl esters, typically methyl methacrylate (MMA)) in monomer raw material A used to prepare acrylic polymers is preferably limited. (Meth)acrylate C1-3 alkyl esters (e.g., (meth)acrylate C1 alkyl esters, typically MMA) tend to have a relatively high Tg, and the cohesiveness of adhesives in acrylic polymers containing the aforementioned monomer components tends to increase. By limiting the amount of (meth)acrylate C1-3 alkyl esters used, the cohesiveness of the adhesive can be appropriately reduced, achieving a suitable elastic modulus (typically surface elastic modulus) that balances flexural strength or adhesive strength. From this perspective, the proportion of (meth)acrylate C1-3 alkyl esters (e.g., (meth)acrylate C1 alkyl esters, typically MMA) in the aforementioned monomer raw material A is preferably set to 8% by weight or less, more preferably 6% by weight or less, even more preferably 3% by weight or less, and even more preferably 1% by weight or less (e.g., 0 to 0.3% by weight).

單體原料A亦可包含作為主成分之(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯並且視需要包含能夠與(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯進行共聚之其他單體(共聚性單體)。作為共聚性單體,可良好地使用具有極性基(例如羧基、羥基、含氮原子之環等)之單體。具有極性基之單體可有助於對丙烯酸系聚合物導入交聯點或提高丙烯酸系聚合物之凝聚力。共聚性單體可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。Monomer raw material A may also include alkyl (meth)acrylate as the main component and, as needed, other monomers (copolymeric monomers) capable of copolymerizing with alkyl (meth)acrylate. As copolymeric monomers, monomers with polar groups (e.g., carboxyl, hydroxyl, nitrogen-containing rings, etc.) are preferred. Monomers with polar groups can help introduce crosslinking points into acrylic polymers or improve the cohesiveness of acrylic polymers. Copolymeric monomers may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

作為共聚性單體之非限定具體例,可例舉以下者。 含羥基單體:例如(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-羥基丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸4-羥基丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸6-羥基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸8-羥基辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸10-羥基癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸12-羥基月桂酯、(甲基)丙烯酸(4-羥基甲基環己基)甲酯等(甲基)丙烯酸羥基烷基酯等。 具有含氮原子之環之單體:例如N-乙烯基-2-吡咯啶酮、N-甲基乙烯基吡咯啶酮、N-乙烯基吡啶、N-乙烯基哌啶酮、N-乙烯基嘧啶、N-乙烯基哌𠯤、N-乙烯基吡𠯤、N-乙烯基吡咯、N-乙烯基咪唑、N-乙烯基㗁唑、N-(甲基)丙烯醯基-2-吡咯啶酮、N-(甲基)丙烯醯基哌啶、N-(甲基)丙烯醯基吡咯啶、N-(甲基)丙烯醯基𠰌啉、N-乙烯基𠰌啉、N-乙烯基-3-𠰌啉酮、N-乙烯基-2-己內醯胺、N-乙烯基-1,3-㗁𠯤-2-酮、N-乙烯基-3,5-𠰌啉二酮、N-乙烯基吡唑、N-乙烯基異㗁唑、N-乙烯基噻唑、N-乙烯基異噻唑、N-乙烯基嗒𠯤等; 例如N-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基亞甲基丁二醯亞胺、N-(甲基)丙烯醯基-6-氧基六亞甲基丁二醯亞胺、N-(甲基)丙烯醯基-8-氧基六亞甲基丁二醯亞胺等具有丁二醯亞胺骨架之單體; 例如N-環己基順丁烯二醯亞胺、N-異丙基順丁烯二醯亞胺、N-月桂基順丁烯二醯亞胺、N-苯基順丁烯二醯亞胺等順丁烯二醯亞胺類;及 例如N-甲基伊康醯亞胺、N-乙基伊康醯亞胺、N-丁基伊康醯亞胺、N-辛基伊康醯亞胺、N-2-乙基己基伊康醯亞胺、N-環己基伊康醯亞胺、N-月桂基伊康醯亞胺等伊康醯亞胺類。 含羧基單體:例如丙烯酸、甲基丙烯酸、丙烯酸羧基乙酯、丙烯酸羧基戊酯、伊康酸、順丁烯二酸、反丁烯二酸、丁烯酸、異丁烯酸等。 含酸酐基單體:例如順丁烯二酸酐、伊康酸酐。 含環氧基單體:例如(甲基)丙烯酸縮水甘油酯或(甲基)丙烯酸-2-乙基縮水甘油醚等含環氧基之丙烯酸酯、烯丙基縮水甘油醚、(甲基)丙烯酸縮水甘油醚等。 含氰基單體:例如丙烯腈、甲基丙烯腈等。 含異氰酸基單體:例如(甲基)丙烯酸2-異氰酸基乙酯等。 含醯胺基單體:例如(甲基)丙烯醯胺;N,N-二甲基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N,N-二乙基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N,N-二丙基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N,N-二異丙基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N,N-二(正丁基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N,N-二(第三丁基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺等N,N-二烷基(甲基)丙烯醯胺;N-乙基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-異丙基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-丁基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-正丁基(甲基)丙烯醯胺等N-烷基(甲基)丙烯醯胺;N-乙烯基乙醯胺等N-乙烯基羧醯胺類;具有羥基與醯胺基之單體,例如N-(2-羥基乙基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-(2-羥基丙基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-(1-羥基丙基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-(3-羥基丙基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-(2-羥基丁基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-(3-羥基丁基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-(4-羥基丁基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺等N-羥基烷基(甲基)丙烯醯胺;具有烷氧基與醯胺基之單體,例如N-甲氧基甲基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-甲氧基乙基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-丁氧基甲基(甲基)丙烯醯胺等N-烷氧基烷基(甲基)丙烯醯胺;此外,N,N-二甲基胺基丙基(甲基)丙烯醯胺等。 (甲基)丙烯酸胺基烷基酯類:例如(甲基)丙烯酸胺基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸N,N-二甲基胺基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸N,N-二乙基胺基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第三丁基胺基乙酯。 含烷氧基單體:例如(甲基)丙烯酸2-甲氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-甲氧基丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-乙氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸丙氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸丁氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙氧基丙酯等(甲基)丙烯酸烷氧基烷基酯類;(甲基)丙烯酸甲氧基乙二醇酯、(甲基)丙烯酸甲氧基聚丙二醇酯等(甲基)丙烯酸烷氧基伸烷基二醇酯類。 含有磺酸基或磷酸基之單體:例如苯乙烯磺酸、烯丙基磺酸、乙烯基磺酸鈉、2-(甲基)丙烯醯胺-2-甲基丙磺酸、(甲基)丙烯醯胺丙磺酸、(甲基)丙烯酸磺丙酯、(甲基)丙烯醯氧基萘磺酸、2-羥基乙基丙烯醯基磷酸酯等。 具有脂環式烴基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯:例如(甲基)丙烯酸環戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸環己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異𦯉酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二環戊酯等。 具有芳香族烴基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯:例如(甲基)丙烯酸苯酯、(甲基)丙烯酸苯氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸苄酯等。 乙烯醚類:例如甲基乙烯醚或乙基乙烯醚等乙烯基烷基醚。 乙烯酯類:例如乙酸乙烯酯、丙酸乙烯酯等。 芳香族乙烯基化合物:例如苯乙烯、α-甲基苯乙烯、乙烯基甲苯等。 烯烴類:例如乙烯、丁二烯、異戊二烯、異丁烯等。 此外,(甲基)丙烯酸四氫呋喃甲酯等含雜環之(甲基)丙烯酸酯、氯乙烯或含氟原子之(甲基)丙烯酸酯等含鹵素原子之(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚矽氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯等含矽原子之(甲基)丙烯酸酯、由萜烯化合物衍生物醇所獲得之(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。 As non-limiting examples of copolymerizable monomers, the following can be cited: Hydroxy-containing monomers: for example, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 6-hydroxyhexyl (meth)acrylate, 8-hydroxyoctyl (meth)acrylate, 10-hydroxydecyl (meth)acrylate, 12-hydroxylauryl (meth)acrylate, methyl (4-hydroxymethylcyclohexyl)acrylate, and other hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates. Monomers having a ring containing a nitrogen atom: for example, N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-methylvinylpyrrolidone, N-vinylpyridine, N-vinylpiperidone, N-vinylpyrimidine, N-vinylpiperidine, N-vinylpyrrole, N-vinylimidazolium, N-vinylpyrazole, N-vinylpyrazole, N-(meth)acryl-2-pyrrolidone, N-(meth)acrylpiperidine, N-(meth)acrylpyrrolidone, N-(meth)acrylpyrrolidone, N-vinylpyrrolidone, N-vinyl-3-pyrrolidone, N-vinyl-2-caprolactone, N-vinyl-1,3-vinyl-2-one, N-vinyl-3,5-pyrrolidone, N-vinylpyrazole, N-vinylisothiazole, N-vinylisothiazole, N-vinylpyrrolidone, etc.; Examples of monomers with a succinyldiphenyl succinyl ... Examples of isonia derivatives include N-methyl isoniaimine, N-ethyl isoniaimine, N-butyl isoniaimine, N-octyl isoniaimine, N-2-ethylhexyl isoniaimine, N-cyclohexyl isoniaimine, and N-lauryl isoniaimine. Carboxyl-containing monomers: Examples include acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, carboxyethyl acrylate, carboxypentyl acrylate, isoniazid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, butenoic acid, and isobutenoic acid. Anhydride-containing monomers: Examples include maleic anhydride and isoniazid anhydride. Epoxy-containing monomers: Examples include epoxy acrylates such as (meth)acrylate or (meth)acrylate-2-ethyl glycidyl ether, allyl glycidyl ether, and (meth)acrylate glycidyl ether. Cyano-containing monomers: Examples include acrylonitrile and methacrylonitrile. Isocyanate-containing monomers: Examples include ethyl (2-isocyanate)acrylate. Amino-containing monomers: Examples include (meth)acrylamide; N,N-dimethyl (meth)acrylamide, N,N-diethyl (meth)acrylamide, N,N-dipropyl (meth)acrylamide, N,N-diisopropyl (meth)acrylamide, N,N-di(n-butyl)(meth)acrylamide, N,N-di(tert-butyl)(meth)acrylamide, etc. N,N-dialkyl(meth)acrylamide; N-ethyl(meth)acrylamide, N-isopropyl(meth)acrylamide, N-butyl(meth)acrylamide, N-n-butyl(meth)acrylamide, and other N-alkyl(meth)acrylamides; N-vinylacetamide and other N-vinylcarboxylate derivatives; monomers having hydroxyl and amide groups, such as N-(2-hydroxyl) N-hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylamides include N-(2-hydroxypropyl)meth)acrylamide, N-(1-hydroxypropyl)meth)acrylamide, N-(3-hydroxypropyl)meth)acrylamide, N-(2-hydroxybutyl)meth)acrylamide, N-(3-hydroxybutyl)meth)acrylamide, and N-(4-hydroxybutyl)meth)acrylamide; monomers having alkoxy and acetylated groups, such as N-methoxymethyl (meth)acrylamide, N-methoxyethyl (meth)acrylamide, and N-butoxymethyl (meth)acrylamide; and N-alkoxyalkyl (meth)acrylamides, etc. Additionally, N,N-dimethylaminopropyl (meth)acrylamide, etc. (Meth)acrylate aminoalkyl esters: Examples include aminoethyl (meth)acrylate, N,N-dimethylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate, N,N-diethylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate, and tributylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate. Alkoxy-containing monomers: Examples include 2-methoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 3-methoxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, propoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, butoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, ethoxypropyl (meth)acrylate, and other (meth)acrylate alkoxyalkyl esters; methoxyethylene glycol (meth)acrylate, methoxypolypropylene glycol (meth)acrylate, and other (meth)acrylate alkoxyalkyl glycol esters. Monomers containing sulfonic acid or phosphoric acid groups: Examples include styrene sulfonic acid, allyl sulfonic acid, sodium vinyl sulfonate, 2-(meth)acrylamide-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid, (meth)acrylamide propanesulfonic acid, (meth)acrylic acid sulfonyl propane, (meth)acryloxynaphthalene sulfonic acid, 2-hydroxyethylacrylamide phosphate, etc. (Meth)acrylates containing alicyclic hydrocarbon groups: Examples include cyclopentyl (meth)acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, isopropyl (meth)acrylate, dicyclopentyl (meth)acrylate, etc. (Meth)acrylates containing aromatic hydrocarbon groups: Examples include phenyl (meth)acrylate, phenoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, benzyl (meth)acrylate, etc. Vinyl ethers: Examples include vinylalkyl ethers such as methyl vinyl ether or ethyl vinyl ether. Vinyl esters: Examples include vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate, etc. Aromatic vinyl compounds: such as styrene, α-methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, etc. Alkenes: such as ethylene, butadiene, isoprene, isobutylene, etc. Furthermore, heterocyclic (meth)acrylates such as tetrahydrofuran methyl (meth)acrylate, halogenated (meth)acrylates such as vinyl chloride or fluorine-containing (meth)acrylates, silicon-containing (meth)acrylates such as polysiloxane (meth)acrylates, and (meth)acrylates obtained from terpene compound derivative alcohols, etc.

於使用此種共聚性單體之情形時,其使用量並無特別限定,通常適宜設為單體原料A之0.01重量%以上。就更良好地發揮由使用共聚性單體所產生之效果之觀點而言,可將共聚性單體之使用量設為單體原料A之0.1重量%以上,亦可設為1重量%以上。於若干較佳態樣中,單體原料A中之共聚性單體之含量為3重量%以上,更佳為5重量%以上,進而較佳為7重量%以上(例如8重量%以上)。呈現共聚性單體之使用量越多,則凝聚性越高,彎曲回復性越高之傾向。又,共聚性單體之使用量可設為單體原料A之50重量%以下,較佳為設為30重量%以下。藉此,可防止黏著劑之凝聚力變得過高,提高常溫(25℃)下之黏著感。於若干較佳態樣中,共聚性單體之使用量係單體原料A之20重量%以下,更佳為15重量%以下(例如12重量%以下),亦可為10重量%以下。藉由限制共聚性單體之使用量,黏著劑之凝聚力降低,彈性模數(典型的是表面彈性模數)成為適宜範圍,容易獲得優異之彎曲保持力,容易實現黏著力上升。When using this copolymerizable monomer, there is no particular limitation on its amount used, but it is generally suitable to set it to 0.01% by weight or more of monomer raw material A. From the viewpoint of better utilizing the effects produced by using the copolymerizable monomer, the amount of copolymerizable monomer used can be set to 0.1% by weight or more of monomer raw material A, or even 1% by weight or more. In several preferred embodiments, the content of copolymerizable monomer in monomer raw material A is 3% by weight or more, more preferably 5% by weight or more, and even more preferably 7% by weight or more (e.g., 8% by weight or more). The higher the amount of copolymerizable monomer used, the higher the cohesiveness and the higher the flexural resilience. Furthermore, the amount of copolymerizable monomer used can be set to 50% by weight or less of monomer raw material A, preferably 30% by weight or less. This prevents the adhesive's cohesive strength from becoming excessive, improving tackiness at room temperature (25°C). In several preferred embodiments, the amount of copolymer used is less than 20% by weight of monomer raw material A, more preferably less than 15% by weight (e.g., less than 12% by weight), and can also be less than 10% by weight. By limiting the amount of copolymer used, the adhesive's cohesive strength is reduced, the elastic modulus (typically the surface elastic modulus) becomes within a suitable range, excellent flexural holding power is easily obtained, and an increase in adhesive strength is easily achieved.

於若干態樣中,單體原料A可包含具有含氮原子之環之單體。藉由使用具有含氮原子之環之單體,可調整黏著劑之凝聚力或極性,適宜地提高加熱後黏著力。藉由使單體原料A中包含具有含氮原子之環之單體,有由上述單體原料A形成之聚合物(A)與上述聚合物(B)之相容性提高之傾向。藉此,容易獲得能以加熱使黏著力大幅地上升之補強用膜。In several embodiments, monomer raw material A may include monomers having a ring containing nitrogen atoms. By using monomers having a ring containing nitrogen atoms, the cohesive force or polarity of the adhesive can be adjusted, and the adhesive force after heating can be appropriately improved. By including monomers having a ring containing nitrogen atoms in monomer raw material A, there is a tendency to improve the compatibility between the polymer (A) formed from the above monomer raw material A and the above polymer (B). In this way, it is easy to obtain a reinforcing film that can significantly increase the adhesive force upon heating.

具有含氮原子之環之單體例如可自上述例示中適當選擇,單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。於若干態樣中,單體原料A較佳為含有選自由N-乙烯基環狀醯胺、及具有(甲基)丙烯醯基之環狀醯胺所組成之群中之至少一種單體作為具有含氮原子之環之單體。Monomers having a nitrogen-containing ring can be suitably selected from the examples above, used alone or in combination of two or more. In several embodiments, monomer raw material A is preferably a monomer containing at least one monomer selected from the group consisting of N-vinylcyclic amides and cyclic amides having (meth)acrylic acid groups as a monomer having a nitrogen-containing ring.

作為N-乙烯基環狀醯胺之具體例,可例舉:N-乙烯基-2-吡咯啶酮、N-乙烯基-2-哌啶酮、N-乙烯基-3-𠰌啉酮、N-乙烯基-2-己內醯胺、N-乙烯基-1,3-㗁𠯤-2-酮、N-乙烯基-3,5-𠰌啉二酮等。尤佳為N-乙烯基-2-吡咯啶酮、N-乙烯基-2-己內醯胺。 作為具有(甲基)丙烯醯基之環狀醯胺之具體例,可例舉:N-(甲基)丙烯醯基-2-吡咯啶酮、N-(甲基)丙烯醯基哌啶、N-(甲基)丙烯醯基吡咯啶、N-(甲基)丙烯醯基𠰌啉等。作為較佳例,可例舉N-丙烯醯基𠰌啉(ACMO)。 Specific examples of N-vinylcyclic amides include: N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-vinyl-2-piperidone, N-vinyl-3-carboxylinone, N-vinyl-2-caprolactone, N-vinyl-1,3-carboxy-2-one, and N-vinyl-3,5-carboxylindione. N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone and N-vinyl-2-caprolactone are particularly preferred. Specific examples of cyclic amides having a (meth)acrylic group include: N-(meth)acryloyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-(meth)acryloylpiperidine, N-(meth)acryloylpyrrolidine, and N-(meth)acryloylcarboxylin. A better example is N-acryloylphosphazeneline (ACMO).

具有含氮原子之環之單體之使用量並無特別限制,通常適宜設為單體原料A之40重量%以下,可設為30重量%以下,可設為20重量%以下,亦可設為10重量%以下。於若干較佳態樣中,就降低凝聚力而降低彈性模數(典型的是表面彈性模數)之觀點而言,單體原料A中,具有含氮原子之環之單體之含量為7重量%以下,更佳為5重量%以下,進而較佳為3重量%以下(例如1.5重量%以下)。又,具有含氮原子之環之單體之使用量通常適宜設為單體原料A之0.01重量%以上(較佳為0.1重量%以上,例如0.5重量%以上)。就獲得適度之凝聚力、彈性模數之觀點而言,於若干態樣中,具有含氮原子之環之單體之使用量可設為單體原料A之0.8重量%以上,亦可設為1.0重量%以上。There is no particular limitation on the amount of monomers containing nitrogen-containing rings used, but it is generally suitable to be 40% by weight or less of monomer raw material A, and can be 30% by weight or less, 20% by weight or less, or 10% by weight or less. In several preferred embodiments, from the viewpoint of reducing cohesion and thus reducing the elastic modulus (typically the surface elastic modulus), the content of monomers containing nitrogen-containing rings in monomer raw material A is 7% by weight or less, more preferably 5% by weight or less, and even more preferably 3% by weight or less (e.g., 1.5% by weight or less). Furthermore, the amount of monomers containing nitrogen-containing rings used is generally suitable to be 0.01% by weight or more of monomer raw material A (preferably 0.1% by weight or more, e.g., 0.5% by weight or more). From the perspective of obtaining appropriate cohesion and elastic modulus, in several states, the amount of monomers with nitrogen-containing rings can be set to 0.8% by weight or more of monomer raw material A, or 1.0% by weight or more.

於若干較佳態樣中,單體原料A包含含羥基單體。藉由使用含羥基單體,可調整黏著劑之凝聚力或極性、進而調整彈性模數(典型的是表面彈性模數),良好地實現此處所揭示之技術之效果。又,含羥基單體提供與下述交聯劑(例如異氰酸酯系交聯劑)之反應點,可藉由交聯反應而提高黏著劑之凝聚力。In several preferred embodiments, monomer material A comprises a hydroxyl-containing monomer. By using the hydroxyl-containing monomer, the cohesiveness or polarity of the adhesive can be adjusted, thereby adjusting the elastic modulus (typically the surface elastic modulus), effectively achieving the effects of the techniques disclosed herein. Furthermore, the hydroxyl-containing monomer provides a reaction site with crosslinking agents (e.g., isocyanate-based crosslinking agents), thereby enhancing the cohesiveness of the adhesive through crosslinking reactions.

作為含羥基單體,可適宜地使用(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸4-羥基丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸6-羥基己酯、N-(2-羥基乙基)(甲基)丙烯醯胺等。其中,作為較佳例,可例舉丙烯酸2-羥基乙酯(HEA)、丙烯酸4-羥基丁酯(4HBA)、N-(2-羥基乙基)丙烯醯胺(HEAA)。就獲得適於彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力之凝聚力之觀點而言,尤佳為4HBA。As hydroxyl-containing monomers, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 6-hydroxyhexyl (meth)acrylate, and N-(2-hydroxyethyl)(meth)acrylamide are suitable examples. Among these, 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (HEA), 4-hydroxybutyl acrylate (4HBA), and N-(2-hydroxyethyl)acrylamide (HEAA) are preferred examples. From the viewpoint of obtaining cohesive strength suitable for bending recovery and bending retention, 4HBA is particularly preferred.

含羥基單體之使用量並無特別限制,通常適宜設為單體原料A之40重量%以下,可設為30重量%以下,亦可設為20重量%以下。於若干較佳態樣中,就降低凝聚力、進而降低彈性模數(典型的是表面彈性模數)之觀點而言,單體原料A中含羥基單體之含量為15重量%以下,更佳為12重量%以下(例如10重量%以下)。藉由限制含羥基單體之使用量,聚合物(B)於黏著劑層內之移動性提高,容易實現黏著力上升。於其他若干態樣中,含羥基單體之含量亦可設為單體原料A之5重量%以下。又,含羥基單體之使用量適宜設為單體原料A之0.01重量%以上(較佳為0.1重量%以上、例如0.5重量%以上)。就獲得適度之凝聚力、彈性模數之觀點而言,於若干較佳態樣中,含羥基單體之使用量為單體原料A之1重量%以上,更佳為3重量%以上,進而較佳為5重量%以上,尤佳為7重量%以上(例如8重量%以上)。There is no particular limitation on the amount of hydroxyl-containing monomer used, but it is generally suitable to set it to 40% by weight or less of monomer raw material A, and it can be set to 30% by weight or less, or even 20% by weight or less. In some preferred embodiments, from the viewpoint of reducing cohesiveness and thus reducing elastic modulus (typically surface elastic modulus), the content of hydroxyl-containing monomer in monomer raw material A is 15% by weight or less, more preferably 12% by weight or less (e.g., 10% by weight or less). By limiting the amount of hydroxyl-containing monomer used, the mobility of polymer (B) within the adhesive layer is improved, making it easier to achieve an increase in adhesive strength. In some other embodiments, the content of hydroxyl-containing monomer can also be set to 5% by weight or less of monomer raw material A. Furthermore, the amount of hydroxyl-containing monomer used is preferably set at 0.01% by weight or more of monomer raw material A (preferably 0.1% by weight or more, for example 0.5% by weight or more). From the viewpoint of obtaining suitable cohesiveness and elastic modulus, in several preferred states, the amount of hydroxyl-containing monomer used is 1% by weight or more of monomer raw material A, more preferably 3% by weight or more, further preferably 5% by weight or more, and even more preferably 7% by weight or more (for example 8% by weight or more).

於若干態樣中,作為共聚性單體,可併用具有含氮原子之環之單體與含羥基單體。於該情形時,具有含氮原子之環之單體與含羥基單體之合計量例如可設為單體原料A之0.1重量%以上,較佳為1重量%以上,更佳為3重量%以上,進而較佳為5重量%以上,尤佳為7重量%以上(例如9重量%以上),可設為10重量%以上,可設為15重量%以上,可設為20重量%以上,亦可設為25重量%以上。又,具有含氮原子之環之單體與含羥基單體之合計量例如可設為單體原料A之50重量%以下,較佳為30重量%以下。於若干較佳態樣中,具有含氮原子之環之單體與含羥基單體之合計量為單體原料A之20重量%以下,更佳為15重量%以下(例如12重量%以下)。In several formulations, monomers having a nitrogen-containing ring and hydroxyl-containing monomers can be used together as copolymers. In this case, the total amount of the monomer having a nitrogen-containing ring and the hydroxyl-containing monomer can be, for example, set to 0.1% by weight or more of monomer raw material A, preferably 1% by weight or more, more preferably 3% by weight or more, further preferably 5% by weight or more, particularly preferably 7% by weight or more (e.g., 9% by weight or more), can be set to 10% by weight or more, can be set to 15% by weight or more, can be set to 20% by weight or more, and can also be set to 25% by weight or more. Furthermore, the total amount of the monomer having a nitrogen-containing ring and the hydroxyl-containing monomer can be, for example, set to 50% by weight or less of monomer raw material A, preferably 30% by weight or less. In several preferred samples, the total amount of the monomer having a nitrogen-containing ring and the hydroxyl-containing monomer is 20% by weight or less, more preferably 15% by weight or less (e.g., 12% by weight or less) of monomer raw material A.

於單體原料A組合包含具有含氮原子之環之單體與含羥基單體之態樣中,該單體原料A中之具有含氮原子之環之單體之含量(W N)與含羥基單體之含量(W OH)之關係(重量基準)並無特別限定。W N/W OH例如可為0.01以上,通常適宜為0.05以上,可為0.10以上,亦可為0.12以上。又,W N/W OH例如可為10以下,通常適宜為1以下,較佳為0.50以下,可為0.30以下,可為0.20以下,亦可為0.15以下。 In monomer raw material A, which comprises a monomer having a nitrogen-containing ring and a hydroxyl-containing monomer, the relationship (by weight) between the content of the nitrogen-containing ring monomer (W <sub>N </sub>) and the content of the hydroxyl-containing monomer (W <sub>OH </sub>) in monomer raw material A is not particularly limited. W <sub>N</sub> /W<sub>OH</sub> can be, for example, 0.01 or more, typically 0.05 or more, 0.10 or more, or 0.12 or more. Furthermore, W <sub>N</sub> /W<sub> OH </sub> can be, for example, 10 or less, typically 1 or less, preferably 0.50 or less, 0.30 or less, 0.20 or less, or 0.15 or less.

於若干態樣中,單體原料A較佳為不含可良好地用作下述單體原料B之構成成分的具有聚有機矽氧烷骨架之單體(單體S1),或該單體之含量未達單體原料A之10重量%(更佳為未達5重量%、例如未達2重量%)。藉由此種組成之單體原料A,可良好地實現良好地兼顧初期之二次加工性與黏著力上升後之強黏著性的補強用膜。就相同之原因而言,於其他若干態樣中,單體原料A較佳為不含單體S1,或於含有單體S1之情形時其含量(重量基準)低於單體原料B中之單體S1之含量。In several embodiments, monomer raw material A is preferably free of monomer (single S1) having a polyorganosiloxane backbone, which can be well used as a constituent component of monomer raw material B described below, or the content of such monomer is less than 10% by weight of monomer raw material A (more preferably less than 5% by weight, for example less than 2% by weight). Monomer raw material A with this composition can effectively achieve a reinforcing film that balances initial secondary processingability with strong adhesion after the adhesion has increased. For the same reason, in several other embodiments, monomer raw material A is preferably free of monomer S1, or, if it contains monomer S1, its content (by weight) is lower than the content of monomer S1 in monomer raw material B.

獲得聚合物(A)之方法並無特別限定,例如可適當採用溶液聚合法、乳化聚合法、塊體聚合法、懸濁聚合法、光聚合法等各種聚合方法。於若干態樣中,可良好地採用溶液聚合法。進行溶液聚合時之聚合溫度可根據所使用之單體及溶劑之種類、聚合起始劑之種類等而適當選擇,例如可設為20℃~170℃左右(典型為40℃~140℃左右)。There are no particular limitations on the method for obtaining polymer (A). For example, various polymerization methods such as solution polymerization, emulsion polymerization, bulk polymerization, suspension polymerization, and photopolymerization can be appropriately used. Solution polymerization is a good choice for several states. The polymerization temperature during solution polymerization can be appropriately selected according to the type of monomer and solvent used, as well as the type of polymerization initiator. For example, it can be set to around 20℃ to 170℃ (typically around 40℃ to 140℃).

用於聚合之起始劑可根據聚合方法而自先前公知之熱聚合起始劑或光聚合起始劑等中適當選擇。聚合起始劑可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。The initiator used for polymerization can be appropriately selected from previously known thermal polymerization initiators or photopolymerization initiators, depending on the polymerization method. The polymerization initiator can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

作為熱聚合起始劑,例如可例舉:偶氮系聚合起始劑(例如2,2'-偶氮二異丁腈、2,2'-偶氮雙-2-甲基丁腈、2,2'-偶氮雙(2-甲基丙酸)二甲酯、4,4'-偶氮雙-4-氰基戊酸、偶氮二異戊腈、2,2'-偶氮雙(2-脒基丙烷)二鹽酸鹽、2,2'-偶氮雙[2-(5-甲基-2-咪唑啉-2-基)丙烷]二鹽酸鹽、2,2'-偶氮雙(2-甲基丙脒)二硫酸鹽、2,2'-偶氮雙(N,N'-二亞甲基異丁基脒)二鹽酸鹽等);過硫酸鉀等過硫酸鹽;過氧化物系聚合起始劑(例如過氧化二苯甲醯、過氧化順丁烯二酸第三丁酯、過氧化月桂醯等);氧化還原系聚合起始劑等。熱聚合起始劑之使用量並無特別限制,例如相對於丙烯酸系聚合物之製備所使用之單體成分(單體原料A)100重量份,可設為0.01重量份~5重量份、較佳為0.05重量份~3重量份之範圍內之量。Examples of thermal polymerization initiators include: azo-based polymerization initiators (e.g., 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile, 2,2'-azobis-2-methylbutyronitrile, 2,2'-azobis(2-methylpropionic acid) dimethyl ester, 4,4'-azobis-4-cyanopentanoic acid, azobisisopentanone, 2,2'-azobis(2-amidinylpropane) dihydrochloride, 2,2'-azobis[2-(5-methyl... [-2-imidazolin-2-yl)propane] dihydrochloride, 2,2'-azobis(2-methylpropanediamine) disulfide, 2,2'-azobis(N,N'-dimethyleneisobutylammonium) dihydrochloride, etc.; persulfates such as potassium persulfate; peroxide-based polymerization initiators (e.g., benzoyl peroxide, tributyl peroxymonoacrylate, lauryl peroxide, etc.); redox-based polymerization initiators, etc. There are no particular restrictions on the amount of thermal polymerization initiator used. For example, relative to 100 parts by weight of the monomer component (monomer raw material A) used in the preparation of acrylic polymers, the amount can be set to 0.01 parts by weight to 5 parts by weight, preferably 0.05 parts by weight to 3 parts by weight.

作為光聚合起始劑,並無特別限制,例如可使用安息香醚系光聚合起始劑、苯乙酮系光聚合起始劑、α-酮醇系光聚合起始劑、芳香族磺醯氯系光聚合起始劑、光活性肟系光聚合起始劑、安息香系光聚合起始劑、苯偶醯系光聚合起始劑、二苯甲酮系光聚合起始劑、縮酮系光聚合起始劑、9-氧硫𠮿系光聚合起始劑、醯基氧化膦系光聚合起始劑等。光聚合起始劑之使用量並無特別限制,例如相對於100重量份單體原料A,可設為0.01重量份~5重量份、較佳為0.05重量份~3重量份之範圍內之量。There are no particular limitations on its use as a photopolymerization initiator. For example, benzoin ether-based photopolymerization initiators, acetophenone-based photopolymerization initiators, α-keto alcohol-based photopolymerization initiators, aromatic sulfonyl chloride-based photopolymerization initiators, photoactive oxime-based photopolymerization initiators, benzoin-based photopolymerization initiators, benzoin-based photopolymerization initiators, benzophenone-based photopolymerization initiators, ketone-based photopolymerization initiators, and 9-oxosulfuron-methyl-2-ethylhexylene ... Photopolymerization initiators, such as phosphine oxide photopolymerization initiators, etc. There is no particular limitation on the amount of photopolymerization initiator used. For example, relative to 100 parts by weight of monomer raw material A, it can be set to a range of 0.01 parts by weight to 5 parts by weight, preferably 0.05 parts by weight to 3 parts by weight.

於若干態樣中,聚合物(A)可以對在如上所述之單體原料A中調配聚合起始劑所得之混合物照射紫外線(UV)而使該單體成分之一部分聚合之部分聚合物(聚合物漿液)之形態含有於用以形成黏著劑層之黏著劑組合物中。可將含有該聚合物漿液之黏著劑組合物塗佈於規定之被塗佈體,照射紫外線而使聚合完成。即,上述聚合物漿液可理解為聚合物(A)之前驅物。此處所揭示之黏著劑層例如可使用含有上述聚合物漿液與聚合物(B)之黏著劑組合物而形成。In several embodiments, polymer (A) can be contained in an adhesive composition for forming an adhesive layer. This is achieved by irradiating a mixture of monomer raw material A, which contains a polymer (polymer slurry), with ultraviolet light (UV) to polymerize a portion of the monomer component. The adhesive composition containing the polymer slurry can be applied to a specified substrate and irradiated with UV light to complete the polymerization. That is, the polymer slurry can be understood as a precursor of polymer (A). The adhesive layer disclosed herein can be formed, for example, using an adhesive composition containing the polymer slurry and polymer (B).

(聚合物(B)) 此處所揭示之技術中之聚合物(B)係包含具有聚有機矽氧烷骨架之單體(以下,亦稱為「單體S1」)與(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之單體成分(單體原料B)之聚合物。聚合物(B)可稱為單體S1與(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之共聚物。聚合物(B)可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。聚合物(B)藉由源於單體S1之聚有機矽氧烷結構之低極性及運動性,可作為抑制貼附於被黏著體之初期之黏著力且藉由加熱會使對被黏著體之黏著力上升的黏著力上升延遲劑發揮功能。作為單體S1,並無特別限定,可使用含有聚有機矽氧烷骨架之任意單體。單體S1藉由源於其結構之低極性,而於使用前(貼附於被黏著體之前)之補強用膜中促進聚合物(B)偏靠於黏著劑層表面,表現出貼合初期之輕剝離性(低黏著性)。單體S1可良好地使用單末端具有聚合性反應基之結構者。藉由包含此種單體S1單元及(甲基)丙烯酸系單體單元之構成,形成側鏈具有聚有機矽氧烷骨架之聚合物(B)。該結構之聚合物(B)藉由側鏈之運動性及移動容易性而容易成為初期黏著力較低且加熱後黏著力較高者。又,於若干態樣中,單體S1可良好地採用一末端具有聚合性反應基且另一末端不具有與聚合物(A)產生交聯反應之官能基者。使此種結構之單體S1共聚而成之聚合物(B)藉由源於單體S1之聚有機矽氧烷結構之運動性而容易成為初期黏著力較低且加熱後黏著力較高者。 (Polymer (B)) The polymer (B) disclosed herein is a polymer comprising a monomer component (monomer raw material B) having a polyorganosiloxane backbone (hereinafter also referred to as "monomer S1") and a (meth)acrylate monomer. Polymer (B) may be referred to as a copolymer of monomer S1 and a (meth)acrylate monomer. Polymer (B) may be used alone or in combination with two or more monomers. Due to the low polarity and kinematic properties of the polyorganosiloxane structure derived from monomer S1, polymer (B) functions as an adhesion force retarder, suppressing initial adhesion to the substrate and increasing adhesion to the substrate upon heating. There is no particular limitation on monomer S1; any monomer containing a polyorganosiloxane backbone may be used. Monomer S1, due to its low polarity, promotes polymer (B) to favor the adhesive layer surface in the reinforcing film before application (before being attached to the substrate), exhibiting mild peelability (low adhesion) in the initial bonding stage. Monomer S1 is well-suited for structures with polymerizable reactive groups at single ends. By incorporating this monomer S1 unit and (meth)acrylate monomer units, a polymer (B) with a polyorganosiloxane backbone on the side chains is formed. This polymer (B) structure readily exhibits lower initial adhesion and higher adhesion after heating due to the mobility and ease of movement of the side chains. Furthermore, among several states, monomer S1 can readily adopt a functional group at one end that is polymerizable and reactive, while the other end lacks a functional group that would crosslink with polymer (A). Polymer (B) copolymerized from monomer S1 of this structure readily exhibits lower initial adhesion and higher adhesion upon heating due to the mobility of the polyorganosiloxane structure derived from monomer S1.

作為單體S1,例如可使用下述通式(1)或(2)所表示之化合物。更具體而言,作為信越化學工業公司製造之單末端反應性聚矽氧油,可例舉X-22-174ASX、X-22-2426、X-22-2475、KF-2012等。單體S1可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。 [化1] [化2] 此處,上述通式(1)、(2)中之R 3為氫或甲基,R 4為甲基或1價有機基,m及n為0以上之整數。 As monomer S1, compounds represented by the following general formula (1) or (2) can be used, for example. More specifically, examples of single-terminal reactive polysiloxane oils manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. include X-22-174ASX, X-22-2426, X-22-2475, and KF-2012. Monomer S1 can be used alone or in combination with two or more. [Chemical 1] [Chemistry 2] Here, in the above general formulas (1) and (2), R3 is hydrogen or methyl, R4 is methyl or monovalent organic group, and m and n are integers greater than or equal to 0.

單體S1之官能基當量可於使用該單體S1發揮所期望之效果之範圍內採用適當值,並不限定於特定範圍。就充分抑制初期黏著力之觀點而言,上述官能基當量例如為100 g/mol以上、或200 g/mol以上,適宜為300 g/mol以上(例如500 g/mol以上),較佳為800 g/mol以上,更佳為1500 g/mol以上。於特佳態樣中,就兼顧貼附初期之低黏著性與加熱後之黏著力上升之觀點而言,上述官能基當量為2000 g/mol以上,進而尤佳為2500 g/mol以上,可為3000 g/mol以上,可為4000 g/mol以上,亦可為5000 g/mol以上。於其他若干態樣中,上述官能基當量可為9000 g/mol以上,可為12000 g/mol以上,亦可為15000 g/mol以上。The functional group equivalent of monomer S1 can be an appropriate value within the range that allows the monomer S1 to achieve the desired effect, and is not limited to a specific range. From the viewpoint of sufficiently suppressing initial adhesion, the aforementioned functional group equivalent is, for example, 100 g/mol or more, or 200 g/mol or more, preferably 300 g/mol or more (e.g., 500 g/mol or more), more preferably 800 g/mol or more, and even more preferably 1500 g/mol or more. In the particularly preferred state, from the viewpoint of balancing low adhesion in the initial stage of adhesion and the increase in adhesion after heating, the aforementioned functional group equivalent is 2000 g/mol or more, more preferably 2500 g/mol or more, and can be 3000 g/mol or more, 4000 g/mol or more, or 5000 g/mol or more. In several other states, the equivalent of the above functional groups can be above 9000 g/mol, above 12000 g/mol, or above 15000 g/mol.

就充分提昇黏著力之觀點而言,上述官能基當量例如適宜為30000 g/mol以下,可為20000 g/mol以下,可未達15000 g/mol,亦可未達10000 g/mol。於若干較佳態樣中,單體S1之官能基當量為7000 g/mol以下,更佳為5500 g/mol以下,進而較佳為4500 g/mol以下,可為4200 g/mol以下,亦可為3500 g/mol以下。若單體S1之官能基當量在上述範圍內,則黏著劑層內之相容性(例如與基礎聚合物之相容性)易變得良好,又,聚合物(B)之聚有機矽氧烷骨架(鏈)之運動性良好,進而容易將聚合物(B)之移動性調節為適度範圍,容易實現兼顧初期低黏著性與加熱後黏著力上升之黏著劑層。From the perspective of fully enhancing adhesion, the aforementioned functional group equivalent is preferably 30,000 g/mol or less, possibly 20,000 g/mol or less, possibly less than 15,000 g/mol or less than 10,000 g/mol. In several preferred states, the functional group equivalent of monomer S1 is 7,000 g/mol or less, more preferably 5,500 g/mol or less, even more preferably 4,500 g/mol or less, possibly 4,200 g/mol or less, or possibly 3,500 g/mol or less. If the functional group equivalent of monomer S1 is within the above range, the compatibility of the adhesive layer (e.g., compatibility with the base polymer) is easily improved. Furthermore, the polysiloxane backbone (chain) of polymer (B) has good mobility, which makes it easy to adjust the mobility of polymer (B) to an appropriate range, and easily achieve an adhesive layer that balances low initial tackiness with increased adhesive strength after heating.

此處,「官能基當量」係指鍵結於每1個官能基之主骨架(例如聚二甲基矽氧烷)之重量。關於標記單位g/mol,換算成官能基1 mol。單體S1之官能基當量例如可根據基於核磁共振(NMR)之 1H-NMR(質子NMR)之光譜強度而算出。基於 1H-NMR之光譜強度之單體S1之官能基當量(g/mol)之算出可基於有關 1H-NMR光譜解析之一般結構解析方法,視需要參照日本專利第5951153號公報之記載而進行。單體S1之官能基當量中,上述官能基意指聚合性官能基(例如(甲基)丙烯醯基、乙烯基、烯丙基等乙烯性不飽和基)。 Here, "functional group equivalent" refers to the weight of the backbone (e.g., polydimethylsiloxane) bonded to each functional group. The unit g/mol is converted to 1 mol of functional groups. The functional group equivalent of monomer S1 can be calculated, for example, based on the spectral intensity of 1H -NMR (proton NMR) based on nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR). The calculation of the functional group equivalent (g/mol) of monomer S1 based on the spectral intensity of 1H -NMR can be based on general structural analysis methods for 1H -NMR spectral analysis, and may be performed as required by reference to the description in Japanese Patent No. 5951153. In the functional group equivalent of monomer S1, the aforementioned functional group refers to polymerizable functional groups (e.g., vinyl, allyl, and other vinyl unsaturated groups).

再者,於使用官能基當量不同之兩種以上之單體作為單體S1之情形時,作為單體S1之官能基當量,可使用算術平均值。即,包含官能基當量不同之n種單體(單體S1 1、單體S1 2・・・單體S1 n)的單體S1之官能基當量可藉由下述式進行計算。 單體S1之官能基當量(g/mol)=(單體S1 1之官能基當量×單體S1 1之調配量+單體S1 2之官能基當量×單體S1 2之調配量+・・・+單體S1 n之官能基當量×單體S1 n之調配量)/(單體S1 1之調配量+單體S1 2之調配量+・・・+單體S1 n之調配量) Furthermore, when using two or more monomers with different functional group equivalents as monomer S1, the functional group equivalent of monomer S1 can be expressed as an arithmetic mean. That is, the functional group equivalent of monomer S1, which includes n monomers (single S11 , S12 , ..., S1n ) with different functional group equivalents, can be calculated using the following formula: Functional group equivalent of monomer S1 (g/mol) = (Functional group equivalent of monomer S11 × Amount of monomer S11 + Functional group equivalent of monomer S12 × Amount of monomer S12 + ... + Functional group equivalent of monomer S1n × Amount of monomer S1n ) / (Amount of monomer S11 + Amount of monomer S12 + ... + Amount of monomer S1n )

單體S1之含量可於使用該單體S1發揮所期望之效果之範圍內採用適當值,並不限定於特定範圍。就充分地抑制初期黏著力之觀點而言,於若干態樣中,用以製備聚合物(B)之單體成分(單體原料B)之總量中,單體S1之含量例如可為5重量%以上,就更好地發揮作為黏著力上升延遲劑之效果之觀點而言,較佳為10重量%以上,更佳為12重量%以上,進而較佳為15重量%以上,尤佳為18重量%以上,亦可為20重量%以上。又,就聚合反應性或相容性之觀點而言,單體原料B中之單體S1之含量例如可為80重量%以下,適宜設為60重量%以下,較佳為50重量%以下,更佳為40重量%以下,進而較佳為30重量%以下。藉由將單體S1之聚合比率設為適當範圍,可適宜地表現黏著力之上升。The content of monomer S1 can be appropriate within the range that allows the monomer S1 to exert the desired effect, and is not limited to a specific range. From the viewpoint of sufficiently suppressing initial adhesion, in several states, the content of monomer S1 in the total amount of the monomer component (monomer raw material B) used to prepare polymer (B) can be, for example, 5% by weight or more. From the viewpoint of better exerting the effect as an adhesion rise delayer, it is preferably 10% by weight or more, more preferably 12% by weight or more, even more preferably 15% by weight or more, particularly preferably 18% by weight or more, and may also be 20% by weight or more. Furthermore, from the perspective of polymerization reactivity or compatibility, the content of monomer S1 in monomer raw material B can be, for example, 80% by weight or less, preferably 60% by weight or less, more preferably 50% by weight or less, even more preferably 40% by weight or less, and even more preferably 30% by weight or less. By setting the polymerization ratio of monomer S1 within an appropriate range, an increase in adhesive force can be appropriately observed.

單體原料B除單體S1以外,還包含能夠與單體S1共聚之(甲基)丙烯酸系單體。藉由使用一種或兩種以上之(甲基)丙烯酸系單體,可適宜地調節黏著劑層內之聚合物(B)之移動性。又,亦可有助於改善聚合物(B)與聚合物(A)之相容性。包含(甲基)丙烯酸系單體單元之聚合物(B)可與丙烯酸系聚合物良好地相容,因此容易藉由提高黏著劑層內之聚合物(B)之移動性而實現初期黏著力之降低及加熱後黏著力之提高。In addition to monomer S1, monomer raw material B also contains (meth)acrylate monomers that can copolymerize with monomer S1. By using one or more (meth)acrylate monomers, the mobility of polymer (B) within the adhesive layer can be appropriately adjusted. Furthermore, it can also help improve the compatibility between polymer (B) and polymer (A). Polymer (B) containing (meth)acrylate monomer units is well compatible with acrylic polymers, thus easily achieving a reduction in initial adhesive strength and an increase in adhesive strength after heating by improving the mobility of polymer (B) within the adhesive layer.

此處所揭示之技術中使用之聚合物(B)中,單體原料B所含之(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之組成較佳為設定為,基於該(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之組成之玻璃轉移溫度T B1高於聚合物(A)之玻璃轉移溫度T A。T B1例如可設定為高於0℃。此處,基於(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之組成之玻璃轉移溫度T B1係指僅基於用於製備聚合物(B)之單體成分中(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之組成,藉由Fox式而求出之Tg。T B1可僅以用於製備聚合物(B)之單體成分中(甲基)丙烯酸系單體作為對象,應用上述Fox式,根據各(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之均聚物之玻璃轉移溫度與各(甲基)丙烯酸系單體於該(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之合計量中所占之重量分率而算出。藉由玻璃轉移溫度T B1相對較高之(典型的是高於0℃之)聚合物(B),容易抑制初期黏著力。又,藉由玻璃轉移溫度T B1相對較高之(典型的是高於0℃之)聚合物(B),容易獲得黏著力上升比較大之補強用膜。 In the polymer (B) used in the technology disclosed herein, the composition of the (meth)acrylic monomers contained in monomer raw material B is preferably set such that the glass transition temperature TB1 based on the composition of the (meth)acrylic monomers is higher than the glass transition temperature TA of polymer (A). TB1 can be set, for example, to be higher than 0°C. Here, the glass transition temperature TB1 based on the composition of the (meth)acrylic monomers refers to Tg calculated by the Fox formula based solely on the composition of the (meth)acrylic monomers in the monomer composition used to prepare polymer (B). TB1 can be calculated using only the (meth)acrylate monomers in the monomer composition used to prepare polymer (B). Applying the aforementioned Fox formula, it is determined based on the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer of each (meth)acrylate monomer and the weight fraction of each (meth)acrylate monomer in the total amount of that monomer. Polymers (B) with a relatively high glass transition temperature TB1 (typically above 0°C) are more likely to suppress initial adhesion. Furthermore, polymers (B) with a relatively high glass transition temperature TB1 (typically above 0°C) are more likely to produce reinforcing films with a greater increase in adhesion.

於若干較佳態樣中,T B1為10℃以上,更佳為30℃以上,進而較佳為40℃以上,亦可為45℃以上。若T B1變高,則有貼附初期之黏著力一般更好地得到抑制之傾向。認為其原因在於,藉由T B1為規定溫度以上之聚合物(B),隨著溫度上升至室溫或高於室溫某種程度之高溫區域而導致的聚有機矽氧烷結構部分之運動性或移動性之提高,被聚合物(B)中所含之源自(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之單體單元有效地抑制,可更好地維持因上述聚有機矽氧烷結構部分之存在導致的低黏著性。就穩定性更好地維持貼附初期之低黏著性之觀點而言,於若干態樣中,T B1例如可為50℃以上,可為55℃以上,亦可為60℃以上。又,T B1例如可為120℃以下,亦可為100℃以下。若T B1變低,則有加熱導致之黏著力上升容易化之傾向。於若干較佳態樣中,T B1例如為90℃以下,更佳為70℃以下,進而較佳為60℃以下,尤佳為55℃以下(例如50℃以下)。 In several preferred conditions, TB1 is above 10°C, more preferably above 30°C, and even more preferably above 40°C, and can also be above 45°C. If TB1 is higher, there is a tendency for the initial adhesion force to be better suppressed. This is believed to be because, with TB1 above the specified temperature for polymer (B), the increased mobility or displacement of the polyorganosiloxane structural portion caused by the temperature rising to room temperature or a certain degree above room temperature is effectively suppressed by the monomer units derived from (meth)acrylic acid monomers contained in polymer (B), thus better maintaining the low adhesion caused by the presence of the aforementioned polyorganosiloxane structural portion. From the perspective of better maintaining stability and low adhesion in the initial stage of adhesion, in several conditions, TB1 can be, for example, above 50°C, above 55°C, or above 60°C. Furthermore, TB1 can be, for example, below 120°C or below 100°C. If TB1 is lower, there is a tendency for the adhesion force to increase due to heating to become easier. In several preferred conditions, TB1 is, for example, below 90°C, more preferably below 70°C, further preferably below 60°C, and especially preferably below 55°C (e.g., below 50°C).

就容易發揮藉由適當設定T B1所產生之效果之觀點而言,單體S1與(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之合計量於用以製備聚合物(B)之全部單體成分中所占之比率例如可為50重量%以上,可為70重量%以上,可為85重量%以上,可為90重量%以上,可為95重量%以上,亦可實質上為100重量%。 From the perspective of easily leveraging the effects produced by properly setting TB1 , the ratio of the total amount of monomer S1 and (meth)acrylic monomers in the total monomer composition used to prepare polymer (B) can be, for example, 50% by weight or more, 70% by weight or more, 85% by weight or more, 90% by weight or more, 95% by weight or more, or practically 100% by weight.

聚合物(B)之玻璃轉移溫度T B並無特別限定,可以於此處所揭示之補強用膜中獲得較佳特性之方式進行選擇。聚合物(B)之T B例如可未達50℃,可為30℃以下,可為20℃以下,可為15℃以下,亦可為10℃以下。若聚合物(B)之T B變低,則該聚合物(B)之移動性(典型的是感溫運動性)提高,可使黏著力大幅地上升。於若干較佳態樣中,聚合物(B)之T B為5℃以下,可未達0℃,可為-5℃以下,亦可為-10℃以下。又,於若干態樣中,聚合物(B)之T B例如可為-40℃以上,亦可為-30℃以上。呈現T B越高,則貼附於被黏著體時偏靠於黏著劑層表面側之聚合物(B)越有助於降低初期黏著力,貼附初期之輕剝離性越優異之傾向。於若干較佳態樣中,聚合物(B)之T B為-20℃以上,亦可為-15℃以上。藉由將T B設定為適當範圍,可將貼附初期之輕剝離性與加熱後之黏著力上升控制為較佳範圍。 The glass transition temperature TB of polymer (B) is not particularly limited and can be selected in a manner that yields better properties in the reinforcing film disclosed herein. The TB of polymer (B) may, for example, be below 50°C, below 30°C, below 20°C, below 15°C, or below 10°C. If the TB of polymer (B) is lower, the mobility (typically temperature-sensitive mobility) of the polymer (B) increases, which can significantly increase the adhesive force. In several preferred states, the TB of polymer (B) is below 5°C, may not reach 0°C, may be below -5°C, or below -10°C. Furthermore, in several states, the TB of polymer (B) may, for example, be above -40°C or above -30°C. A higher T<sub> B </sub> indicates that the polymer (B) positioned closer to the adhesive layer surface when adhering to the substrate is more conducive to reducing initial tack and exhibits better initial easy peelability. In several preferred samples, the T<sub>B</sub> of polymer (B) is above -20°C, and can also be above -15°C. By setting the T<sub> B </sub> within an appropriate range, the initial easy peelability and the increase in tack after heating can be controlled within an optimal range.

於若干態樣中,用以製備聚合物(B)之單體成分之組成可設定為,T B1高於T B、即T B1-T B大於0℃。根據此種組成,容易適宜地發揮出利用上述單體成分所含之(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之組成調節聚合物(B)之移動性之效果。T B1-T B例如可為40℃~100℃左右,亦可為50℃~90℃左右。於若干較佳態樣中,T B1-T B為45℃以上,更佳為50℃以上,進而較佳為55℃以上(例如58℃以上)。又,就適宜地表現含有聚合物(B)之效果之觀點而言,T B1-T B較佳為80℃以下,更佳為70℃以下,進而較佳為65℃以下(例如62℃以下)。 In several states, the composition of the monomer components used to prepare polymer (B) can be set such that TB1 is higher than TB , i.e., TB1 - TB is greater than 0°C. Based on this composition, the effect of regulating the mobility of polymer (B) by utilizing the composition of (meth)acrylate monomers contained in the aforementioned monomer components can be readily and appropriately achieved. TB1 - TB can be, for example, around 40°C to 100°C, or around 50°C to 90°C. In several preferred states, TB1 - TB is 45°C or higher, more preferably 50°C or higher, and even more preferably 55°C or higher (e.g., 58°C or higher). Furthermore, from the viewpoint of appropriately exhibiting the effects of containing polymer (B), TB1 - TB is preferably below 80°C, more preferably below 70°C, and even more preferably below 65°C (e.g., below 62°C).

就容易控制黏著劑層內之聚合物(B)之移動性之觀點而言,於若干態樣中,用以製備聚合物(B)之單體成分之組成可設定為,於與聚合物(A)之玻璃轉移溫度T A之關係上,T B較T A高20℃以上,即T B-T A為20℃以上。於若干較佳態樣中,T B-T A例如為30℃以上,更佳為40℃以上,進而較佳為50℃以上,可為60℃以上,亦可為70℃以上。又,就黏著力上升之觀點而言,T B-T A例如可為130℃以下,亦可為120℃以下,較佳為100℃以下,更佳為80℃以下,進而較佳為65℃以下,可為55℃以下,亦可為45℃以下。 From the viewpoint of easily controlling the mobility of polymer (B) within the adhesive layer, in several states, the composition of the monomer components used to prepare polymer (B) can be set such that, in relation to the glass transition temperature TA of polymer (A), TB is at least 20°C higher than TA , i.e., TB - TA is at least 20°C. In several preferred states, TB - TA is, for example, at least 30°C, more preferably at least 40°C, even more preferably at least 50°C, and can be at least 60°C or even at least 70°C. Furthermore, from the viewpoint of increasing adhesive strength, TB - TA can be, for example, below 130°C, or below 120°C, preferably below 100°C, even more preferably below 80°C, even more preferably below 65°C, and can be below 55°C or even below 45°C.

作為可用於單體原料B之(甲基)丙烯酸系單體,例如可例舉(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯。此處所謂「烷基」係指鏈狀(包括直鏈狀、支鏈狀)之烷基(基),不包括下述脂環式烴基。例如可使用上文中關於可用於聚合物(A)之(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所例示之單體之一種或兩種以上作為單體原料B之構成成分。於若干態樣中,單體原料B可含有(甲基)丙烯酸C 4-12烷基酯(較佳為(甲基)丙烯酸C 4-10烷基酯,例如(甲基)丙烯酸C 6-10烷基酯)之至少一種。於其他若干態樣中,單體原料B可含有甲基丙烯酸C 1-18烷基酯(較佳為甲基丙烯酸C 1-14烷基酯,例如甲基丙烯酸C 1-10烷基酯)之至少一種。單體原料B可包含例如選自MMA、甲基丙烯酸正丁酯(BMA)及甲基丙烯酸2-乙基己酯(2EHMA)之一種或兩種以上作為(甲基)丙烯酸系單體。 As a (meth)acrylic monomer that can be used in monomer raw material B, alkyl (meth)acrylates may be cited as an example. Here, "alkyl" refers to a chain-like (including linear and branched) alkyl group, excluding alicyclic hydrocarbons described below. For example, one or more of the monomers exemplified above regarding alkyl (meth)acrylates that can be used in polymer (A) may be used as constituents of monomer raw material B. In some embodiments, monomer raw material B may contain at least one of C4-12 alkyl (meth)acrylates (preferably C4-10 alkyl, such as C6-10 alkyl). In other embodiments, monomer raw material B may contain at least one of C1-18 alkyl methacrylates (preferably C1-14 alkyl, such as C1-10 alkyl). Monomer raw material B may include one or more of the following as (meth)acrylic monomers: for example, MMA, n-butyl methacrylate (BMA) and 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate (2EHMA).

作為上述(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之其他例,可例舉具有脂環式烴基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯。例如可使用(甲基)丙烯酸環戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸環己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異𦯉酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二環戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸1-金剛烷基酯等。於若干態樣中,單體原料B可含有選自甲基丙烯酸二環戊酯、甲基丙烯酸異𦯉酯及甲基丙烯酸環己酯之至少一種作為(甲基)丙烯酸系單體。Other examples of the above-mentioned (meth)acrylate monomers include (meth)acrylates having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group. For example, cyclopentyl methacrylate, cyclohexyl methacrylate, isopropyl methacrylate, dicyclopentyl methacrylate, and 1-dalcenic methacrylate can be used. In several embodiments, monomer raw material B may contain at least one selected from dicyclopentyl methacrylate, isopropyl methacrylate, and cyclohexyl methacrylate as a (meth)acrylate monomer.

單體原料B中之上述(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯及上述具有脂環式烴基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯之含量例如可為10重量%以上95重量%以下,可為20重量%以上95重量%以下,可為30重量%以上90重量%以下,可為40重量%以上90重量%以下,亦可為50重量%以上85重量%以下。就藉由加熱之黏著力之上升容易性之觀點而言,使用(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯可變得有利。於若干態樣中,具有脂環式烴基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯之含量可未達單體原料B之50重量%,可未達30重量%,可未達15重量%,可未達10重量%,亦可未達5重量%。亦可不使用具有脂環式烴基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯。The content of the aforementioned alkyl (meth)acrylate and the aforementioned (meth)acrylate containing alicyclic hydrocarbons in monomer raw material B can be, for example, 10% by weight or more and 95% by weight, 20% by weight or more and 95% by weight, 30% by weight or more and 90% by weight, 40% by weight or more and 90% by weight, or 50% by weight or more and 85% by weight. From the viewpoint of ease of increase in adhesive force upon heating, the use of alkyl (meth)acrylate becomes advantageous. In several formulations, the content of (meth)acrylate containing alicyclic hydrocarbons may be less than 50% by weight, less than 30% by weight, less than 15% by weight, less than 10% by weight, or less than 5% by weight of monomer raw material B. Alternatively, (meth)acrylate containing alicyclic hydrocarbons may not be used.

於若干較佳態樣中,作為單體原料B之構成成分之上述(甲基)丙烯酸系單體可包含均聚物之Tg為50℃以上之單體M2。聚合物(B)中,藉由使單體S1與單體M2共聚,容易適宜地控制伴隨溫度上升之聚有機矽氧烷結構部分之運動性或移動性,同時實現初期輕剝離性(二次加工性)與加熱後之黏著力上升。於若干態樣中,單體M2之均聚物之Tg可為60℃以上,可為70℃以上,可為80℃以上,亦可為90℃以上。又,單體M2之均聚物之Tg之上限並無特別限制,就聚合物(B)之合成容易性等觀點而言,通常適宜為200℃以下。於若干態樣中,單體M2之均聚物之Tg例如可為180℃以下,可為150℃以下,亦可為120℃以下。In several preferred embodiments, the aforementioned (meth)acrylic acid monomers, which are components of monomer raw material B, may include monomer M2, whose homopolymer has a Tg of 50°C or higher. In polymer (B), by copolymerizing monomer S1 and monomer M2, the mobility or displacement of the polyorganosiloxane structural portion accompanying temperature rise can be easily and appropriately controlled, while simultaneously achieving initial easy peelability (secondary processing capability) and an increase in adhesion after heating. In several embodiments, the Tg of the homopolymer of monomer M2 can be 60°C or higher, 70°C or higher, 80°C or higher, or 90°C or higher. Furthermore, there is no particular upper limit to the Tg of the homopolymer of monomer M2; from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of polymer (B), it is generally suitable to be below 200°C. In several states, the Tg of the homopolymer of monomer M2 can be, for example, below 180°C, below 150°C, or below 120°C.

作為單體M2,例如可自上述中所例示之(甲基)丙烯酸系單體中使用均聚物之Tg滿足條件者。例如可使用選自由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯及具有脂環式烴基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯所組成之群中之一種或兩種以上之單體。作為(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯,可良好地採用烷基之碳原子數為1~4之範圍之甲基丙烯酸烷基酯。As monomer M2, for example, homopolymers whose Tg meets the requirements can be used from the (meth)acrylic monomers exemplified above. For example, one or more monomers selected from the group consisting of alkyl (meth)acrylates and (meth)acrylates having alicyclic hydrocarbon groups can be used. As an alkyl (meth)acrylate, alkyl methacrylates with the alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms are preferred.

於單體原料B包含單體M2之態樣中,單體M2之含量例如可為單體原料B之5重量%以上,可為10重量%以上,可為15重量%以上,可為20重量%以上,可為25重量%以上,亦可為30重量%以上。於若干態樣中,上述單體M2之含量可為單體原料B之35重量%以上,可為40重量%以上,可為45重量%以上,可為50重量%以上,亦可為55重量%以上。又,上述單體M2之含量例如可為90重量%以下,通常適宜為80重量%以下,較佳為75重量%以下,可為70重量%以下,亦可為65重量%以下。於若干較佳態樣中,單體M2之含量為60重量%以下(例如50重量%以下、典型為42重量%以下)。於聚合物(B)中,藉由將Tg為50℃以上之單體M2之共聚比率限制為規定值以下,可基於50℃附近之聚合物(B)之移動性,良好地實現加熱後之黏著力上升。就相同之觀點而言,單體原料B中之單體M2之含量可為35重量%以下,可為25重量%以下,亦可為15重量%以下(例如5重量%以下)。In a sample containing monomer M2, the content of monomer M2 may be, for example, 5% by weight or more, 10% by weight or more, 15% by weight or more, 20% by weight or more, 25% by weight or more, or 30% by weight or more of monomer B. In several samples, the content of monomer M2 may be 35% by weight or more, 40% by weight or more, 45% by weight or more, 50% by weight or more, or 55% by weight or more of monomer B. Furthermore, the content of monomer M2 may be, for example, 90% by weight or less, typically 80% by weight or less, preferably 75% by weight or less, and may be 70% by weight or less, or 65% by weight or less. In several preferred samples, the content of monomer M2 is 60% by weight or less (e.g., 50% by weight or less, typically 42% by weight or less). In polymer (B), by limiting the copolymerization ratio of monomer M2 with a Tg of 50°C or higher to a specified value, the increase in adhesive force after heating can be effectively achieved based on the mobility of polymer (B) near 50°C. From the same perspective, the content of monomer M2 in monomer raw material B can be 35% by weight or less, 25% by weight or less, or 15% by weight or less (e.g., 5% by weight or less).

上述單體M2之含量例如可良好地應用於單體M2包含選自由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯及上述具有脂環式烴基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯所組成之群中之一種或兩種以上之單體的態樣、或單體M2包含選自(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯(例如甲基丙烯酸烷基酯)之一種或兩種以上之單體的態樣。作為該態樣之一較佳例,可例舉上述單體M2包含MMA之態樣。The aforementioned content of monomer M2 can be well applied, for example, to a state in which monomer M2 comprises one or more monomers selected from the group consisting of alkyl (meth)acrylates and (meth)acrylates having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group, or to a state in which monomer M2 comprises one or more monomers selected from alkyl (meth)acrylates (e.g., alkyl methacrylate). As a preferred example of such a state, a state in which monomer M2 comprises MMA can be exemplified.

於若干態樣中,上述(甲基)丙烯酸系單體亦可包含均聚物之Tg未達50℃(典型的是-20℃以上且未達50℃)之單體M3。藉由使用單體M3,容易獲得於黏著力上升後均衡地兼顧黏著力與凝集力之補強用膜。就容易發揮該效果之觀點而言,單體M3較佳為與單體M2組合而使用。In several formulations, the aforementioned (meth)acrylic acid monomers may also include monomer M3, whose homopolymer Tg is below 50°C (typically above -20°C and below 50°C). By using monomer M3, it is easy to obtain a reinforcing film that balances adhesiveness and cohesiveness evenly after the adhesiveness increases. From the viewpoint of easily achieving this effect, monomer M3 is preferably used in combination with monomer M2.

作為單體M3,例如可自上文中所例示之(甲基)丙烯酸系單體中使用均聚物之Tg滿足條件者。例如可使用選自由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所組成之群中之一種或兩種以上之單體。As monomer M3, for example, homopolymers whose Tg meets the conditions can be used from the (meth)acrylate monomers exemplified above. For example, one or more monomers selected from the group consisting of alkyl (meth)acrylates can be used.

於單體原料B包含單體M3之態樣中,單體M3之含量例如可為單體原料B之5重量%以上,可為10重量%以上,可為15重量%以上,可為20重量%以上,可為25重量%以上,可為30重量%以上,亦可為35重量%以上。又,單體M3之含量通常適宜設為單體原料B之70重量%以下,可為60重量%以下,亦可為50重量%以下。上述單體M3之含量例如可良好地應用於單體M3包含選自(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯(例如甲基丙烯酸烷基酯)之一種或兩種以上單體之態樣。In a sample containing monomer M3 as monomer raw material B, the content of monomer M3 may be, for example, 5% by weight or more, 10% by weight or more, 15% by weight or more, 20% by weight or more, 25% by weight or more, 30% by weight or more, or 35% by weight or more of monomer raw material B. Furthermore, the content of monomer M3 is generally suitable to be 70% by weight or less, 60% by weight or less, or 50% by weight or less of monomer raw material B. The above-mentioned content of monomer M3 is well applicable, for example, to samples in which monomer M3 contains one or more monomers selected from alkyl methacrylates (e.g., alkyl methacrylates).

於此處所揭示之補強用膜之若干態樣中,單體原料B較佳為均聚物之Tg高於170℃之單體之含量為30重量%以下。此處,本說明書中所謂單體之含量為X重量%以下,於未特別說明之情形時,其概念包括該單體之含量為0重量%之態樣、即實質上不含該單體之態樣。又,所謂實質上不含係指至少未刻意地使用上述單體。若均聚物之Tg高於170℃之單體之共聚比率變高,則聚合物(B)之移動性容易不足而有可能難以藉由加熱至高於50℃之溫度區域而使黏著力上升。In the various forms of reinforcing films disclosed herein, the monomer raw material B preferably comprises a homopolymer with a Tg higher than 170°C containing 30% by weight or less of the monomer. Here, unless otherwise specified, the term "monomer content of X% by weight or less" in this specification includes forms with a monomer content of 0% by weight, i.e., forms that substantially do not contain the monomer. Furthermore, "substantially do not contain" means that the aforementioned monomer is not intentionally used. If the copolymerization ratio of monomers with a Tg higher than 170°C in the homopolymer becomes high, the mobility of polymer (B) may be insufficient, making it difficult to increase adhesion by heating to a temperature range higher than 50°C.

於若干態樣中,單體原料B較佳為至少包含MMA作為(甲基)丙烯酸系單體。藉由使MMA共聚而成之聚合物(B),容易獲得加熱後黏著力較大之補強用膜。MMA於單體原料B所含之(甲基)丙烯酸系單體之合計量中所占之比率例如可為5重量%以上,可為10重量%以上,可為20重量%以上,可為30重量%以上,亦可為40重量%以上。又,MMA於單體原料B之合計量中所占之比率通常適宜為95重量%以下,於若干較佳態樣中,就加熱後之黏著力上升之觀點而言,MMA於單體原料B之合計量中所占之比率可為75重量%以下,可為65重量%以下,可為60重量%以下,亦可為55重量%以下(例如50重量%以下)。In several embodiments, monomer raw material B preferably contains at least MMA as a (meth)acrylic monomer. The polymer (B) copolymerized from MMA readily yields a reinforcing film with strong adhesion after heating. The percentage of MMA in the total amount of (meth)acrylic monomers contained in monomer raw material B can be, for example, 5% by weight or more, 10% by weight or more, 20% by weight or more, 30% by weight or more, or 40% by weight or more. Furthermore, the percentage of MMA in the total amount of monomer raw material B is generally preferably 95% by weight or less. In several preferred embodiments, from the viewpoint of increased adhesion after heating, the percentage of MMA in the total amount of monomer raw material B can be 75% by weight or less, 65% by weight or less, 60% by weight or less, or 55% by weight or less (e.g., 50% by weight or less).

作為構成聚合物(B)之單體單元中可與單體S1一起含有之單體之其他例,可例舉:上文中作為可用於聚合物(A)之單體所例示之含羧基單體、含酸酐基單體、含羥基單體、含環氧基單體、含氰基單體、含異氰酸基單體、含醯胺基單體、具有含氮原子之環之單體(N-乙烯基環狀醯胺、具有(甲基)丙烯醯基之環狀醯胺、具有丁二醯亞胺骨架之單體、順丁烯二醯亞胺類、伊康醯亞胺類等)、(甲基)丙烯酸胺基烷基酯類、乙烯酯類、乙烯醚類、烯烴類、具有芳香族烴基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯、含有雜環之(甲基)丙烯酸酯、含有鹵素原子之(甲基)丙烯酸酯、由萜烯化合物衍生物醇獲得之(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。Other examples of monomers that can be contained together with monomer S1 in the monomer units constituting polymer (B) include: carboxyl-containing monomers, anhydride-containing monomers, hydroxyl-containing monomers, epoxy-containing monomers, cyano-containing monomers, isocyanate-containing monomers, amide-containing monomers, monomers having a nitrogen-containing ring (N-vinylcyclic amide, (meth)propylene) Cyclic amides with amide groups, monomers with a succinimide skeleton, cis-butenediamides, isocarboximides, etc., aminoalkyl esters of (meth)acrylates, vinyl esters, vinyl ethers, alkenes, (meth)acrylates with aromatic hydrocarbon groups, (meth)acrylates containing heterocyclic rings, (meth)acrylates containing halogen atoms, and (meth)acrylates obtained from terpene compound derivative alcohols, etc.

作為構成聚合物(B)之單體單元中可與單體S1一起含有之單體之進而其他例,可例舉:乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、丙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二丙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三丙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯等氧伸烷基二(甲基)丙烯酸酯;具有聚氧伸烷基骨架之單體,例如於聚乙二醇或聚丙二醇等聚氧伸烷基鏈之一末端具有(甲基)丙烯醯基、乙烯基、烯丙基等聚合性官能基,於另一末端具有醚結構(烷基醚、芳醚、芳基烷基醚等)之聚合性聚氧伸烷基醚;(甲基)丙烯酸甲氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸丙氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸丁氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙氧基丙酯等(甲基)丙烯酸烷氧基烷基酯;(甲基)丙烯酸鹼金屬鹽等鹽;三羥甲基丙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯等多元(甲基)丙烯酸酯:偏二氯乙烯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-氯乙酯等鹵化乙烯化合物;2-乙烯基-2-㗁唑啉、2-乙烯基-5-甲基-2-㗁唑啉、2-異丙烯基-2-㗁唑啉等含㗁唑啉基之單體;(甲基)丙烯醯基氮丙啶、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-氮丙啶基乙酯等含氮丙啶基之單體;(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥基丙酯、內酯類與(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥基乙酯之加成物等含羥基之乙烯基單體;氟取代(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯等含氟乙烯基單體;2-氯乙基乙烯醚、單氯乙酸乙烯酯等含有反應性鹵素之乙烯基單體;如乙烯基三甲氧基矽烷、γ-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、烯丙基三甲氧基矽烷、三甲氧基矽烷基丙基烯丙胺、2-甲氧基乙氧基三甲氧基矽烷之含有有機矽之乙烯基單體;此外,可例舉:於使乙烯基聚合所得之單體末端具有自由基聚合性乙烯基之巨單體類等。該等可使單獨一種或兩種以上之組合與單體S1共聚。Other examples of monomers that may be contained together with monomer S1 as monomer units constituting polymer (B) include: ethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, diethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, triethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, polyethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, propylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, dipropylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, tripropylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, and other oxyalkylene di(meth)acrylates; monomers having a polyoxyalkylene backbone, such as those in polyethylene glycol or polypropylene glycol. Polymerizable polyoxyalkyl ethers with polymerizable functional groups such as (meth)acrylic, vinyl, or allyl at one end of the chain and ether structures (alkyl ethers, aromatic ethers, arylalkyl ethers, etc.) at the other end; methoxyethyl acrylate, ethoxyethyl acrylate, propoxyethyl acrylate, butoxyethyl acrylate, ethoxypropyl acrylate, and other alkoxyalkyl acrylates; salts such as alkali metal salts of (meth)acrylate; and multi-component (e.g., trihydroxymethylpropane tri(meth)acrylate. Methacrylates: halogenated vinylidene chloride, 2-chloroethyl methacrylate, and other ethoxylated vinylidene chloride compounds; acezoline-containing monomers such as 2-vinyl-2-acezoline, 2-vinyl-5-methyl-2-acezoline, and 2-isopropenyl-2-acezoline; aziridinium-containing monomers such as aziridinium acrylate and aziridinium ethyl methacrylate; hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl methacrylate, lactones, and adducts of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, etc. Vinyl monomers containing fluorinated groups; fluorinated vinyl monomers such as fluorinated (meth)acrylate alkyl esters; vinyl monomers containing reactive halogens such as 2-chloroethyl vinyl ether and vinyl monochloroacetate; vinyl monomers containing organosilicon such as vinyltrimethoxysilane, γ-(meth)acryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, allyltrimethoxysilane, trimethoxysilylpropylallylamine, and 2-methoxyethoxytrimethoxysilane; and, for example, macromonomers with free radical polymerizable vinyl groups at the ends of the monomers obtained by polymerizing vinyl groups. These can be copolymerized with monomer S1 alone or in combination with two or more of them.

於若干態樣中,作為聚合物(B),可良好地採用不具有與聚合物(A)產生交聯反應之官能基者。換言之,聚合物(B)較佳為以不與聚合物(A)化學鍵結之形態含有於黏著劑層中。以此種形態含有聚合物(B)之黏著劑層於加熱時聚合物(B)之移動性良好,適於提高黏著力上升比。與聚合物(A)產生交聯反應之官能基可能因該聚合物(A)所具有之官能基之種類而異,例如可為環氧基、異氰酸基、羧基、烷氧基矽烷基、胺基等。Among several states, polymer (B) is preferably one that does not possess functional groups that would cause cross-linking reactions with polymer (A). In other words, polymer (B) is preferably contained in the adhesive layer in a form that does not chemically bond with polymer (A). An adhesive layer containing polymer (B) in this form exhibits good mobility of polymer (B) upon heating, which is suitable for increasing the adhesive strength ratio. The functional groups that would cause cross-linking reactions with polymer (A) may vary depending on the types of functional groups possessed by polymer (A), and may be, for example, epoxy, isocyanate, carboxyl, alkoxysilyl, amino, etc.

聚合物(B)之Mw並無特別限定。聚合物(B)之Mw例如可為1000以上,亦可為5000以上。於若干較佳態樣中,就適宜地表現加熱後之黏著力上升之觀點而言,聚合物(B)之Mw可為10,000以上,更佳為12,000以上,可為15,000以上,可為20,000以上,可為22,000以上,亦可為25,000以上。於其他若干態樣中,聚合物(B)之Mw可為30,000以上,可為50,000以上,亦可為70,000以上。聚合物(B)之Mw之上限例如為500,000以下,可為350,000以下,可為200,000以下,亦可為150,000以下。就將黏著劑層內之相容性或移動性調節至適度範圍,適宜地表現貼附初期之低黏著性之觀點而言,於若干較佳態樣中,聚合物(B)之Mw為100,000以下,更佳為80,000以下,進而較佳為60,000以下,尤佳為40,000以下(例如30,000以下),可為25,000以下,進而亦可為20,000以下。藉由將聚合物(B)之Mw設定為適當範圍,容易獲得貼附初期之輕剝離性與黏著力上升性之兼顧性優異之黏著劑。The Mw of polymer (B) is not particularly limited. The Mw of polymer (B) may be, for example, 1000 or more, or 5000 or more. In several preferred embodiments, from the viewpoint of suitably exhibiting an increase in adhesive force after heating, the Mw of polymer (B) may be 10,000 or more, more preferably 12,000 or more, 15,000 or more, 20,000 or more, 22,000 or more, or 25,000 or more. In several other embodiments, the Mw of polymer (B) may be 30,000 or more, 50,000 or more, or 70,000 or more. The upper limit of the Mw of polymer (B) may be, for example, 500,000 or less, 350,000 or less, 200,000 or less, or 150,000 or less. From the perspective of adjusting the compatibility or mobility within the adhesive layer to an appropriate range to suitably exhibit low adhesion in the initial stage of application, in several preferred embodiments, the Mw of polymer (B) is 100,000 or less, more preferably 80,000 or less, further preferably 60,000 or less, especially preferably 40,000 or less (e.g., 30,000 or less), and can be 25,000 or less, and can also be 20,000 or less. By setting the Mw of polymer (B) to an appropriate range, an adhesive that achieves an excellent balance between easy peeling and increased adhesion in the initial stage of application can be easily obtained.

於若干較佳態樣中,聚合物(B)之Mw較佳為低於聚合物(A)之Mw。藉此,容易實現兼顧貼附初期之良好二次加工性與加熱後之黏著力上升之補強用膜。於若干態樣中,聚合物(B)之Mw例如可為聚合物(A)之Mw之0.8倍以下,可為0.75倍以下,可為0.5倍以下,亦可為0.3倍以下。於若干較佳態樣中,聚合物(B)之Mw B相對於聚合物(A)之Mw A之比(Mw B/Mw A)為0.3以下,更佳為0.2以下,進而較佳為0.1以下,尤佳為0.06以下(例如0.05以下)。又,比(Mw B/Mw A)例如適宜為0.010以上,較佳為0.020以上,更佳為0.03以上,進而較佳為0.04以上。藉由將聚合物(A)之Mw與聚合物(B)之Mw設定為適宜範圍,可更好地實現此處所揭示之技術之效果。於其他若干態樣中,聚合物(B)之Mw亦可為聚合物(A)之Mw之0.03倍以下(例如0.02倍以下)。 In several preferred embodiments, the Mw of polymer (B) is preferably lower than that of polymer (A). This facilitates the creation of a reinforcing film that balances good secondary processing properties during initial application with increased adhesion after heating. In several preferred embodiments, the Mw of polymer (B) may be, for example, less than 0.8 times, less than 0.75 times, less than 0.5 times, or less than 0.3 times that of polymer (A). In several preferred embodiments, the ratio of MwB of polymer (B) to MwA of polymer (A) ( MwB / MwA ) is less than 0.3, more preferably less than 0.2, further preferably less than 0.1, and most preferably less than 0.06 (e.g., less than 0.05). Furthermore, the ratio (Mw B / Mw A ) is preferably 0.010 or higher, more preferably 0.020 or higher, even more preferably 0.03 or higher, and even more preferably 0.04 or higher. By setting the Mw of polymer (A) and the Mw of polymer (B) to suitable ranges, the effects of the technology disclosed herein can be better achieved. In several other embodiments, the Mw of polymer (B) may also be less than 0.03 times (e.g., less than 0.02 times) of the Mw of polymer (A).

聚合物(B)例如可藉由利用溶液聚合法、乳化聚合法、塊體聚合法、懸濁聚合法、光聚合法等公知方法使上述單體聚合而製作。Polymer (B) can be produced by polymerizing the aforementioned monomers using known methods such as solution polymerization, emulsion polymerization, bulk polymerization, suspension polymerization, and photopolymerization.

為了調整聚合物(B)之分子量,可視需要使用鏈轉移劑。作為所使用之鏈轉移劑之例,可例舉:辛基硫醇、月桂基硫醇、第三壬基硫醇、第三(十二烷基)硫醇、巰基乙醇、α-硫甘油等具有巰基之化合物;硫代乙醇酸、硫代乙醇酸甲酯、硫代乙醇酸乙酯、硫代乙醇酸丙酯、硫代乙醇酸丁酯、硫代乙醇酸第三丁酯、硫代乙醇酸2-乙基己酯、硫代乙醇酸辛酯、硫代乙醇酸異辛酯、硫代乙醇酸癸酯、硫代乙醇酸十二烷基酯、乙二醇之硫代乙醇酸酯、新戊二醇之硫代乙醇酸酯、季戊四醇之硫代乙醇酸酯等硫代乙醇酸酯類;α-甲基苯乙烯二聚物等。To adjust the molecular weight of polymer (B), chain transfer agents may be used as needed. Examples of chain transfer agents that may be used include: compounds with a pi group such as octylthiol, laurylthiol, nonylthiol, dodecylthiol, pi-ethanol, and α-thioglycerol; thioglycolic acid, methyl thioglycolate, ethyl thioglycolate, propyl thioglycolate, butyl thioglycolate, tributyl thioglycolate, 2-ethylhexyl thioglycolate, octyl thioglycolate, isooctyl thioglycolate, decyl thioglycolate, dodecyl thioglycolate, thioglycolates of ethylene glycol, neopentyl glycol, and pentaerythritol; and α-methylstyrene dimers, etc.

作為鏈轉移劑之使用量,並無特別限制,通常相對於單體100重量份,含有鏈轉移劑0.05重量份~20重量份,較佳為0.1重量份~15重量份,進而較佳為0.2重量份~10重量份。藉由如此調整鏈轉移劑之添加量,可獲得較佳之分子量之聚合物(B)。鏈轉移劑可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。There are no particular restrictions on the amount of chain transfer agent used. Typically, it contains 0.05 to 20 parts by weight, preferably 0.1 to 15 parts by weight, and even more preferably 0.2 to 10 parts by weight, relative to 100 parts by weight of the monomer. By adjusting the amount of chain transfer agent added in this way, a polymer (B) with a better molecular weight can be obtained. The chain transfer agent can be used alone or in combination with two or more others.

作為調整聚合物(B)之分子量之方法,可將包括使用上述鏈轉移劑之先前公知之各種方法單獨使用或適當組合使用。關於聚合物(A)之分子量亦同樣如此。此種方法之非限定例包括聚合方法之選擇、聚合起始劑之種類或使用量之選擇、聚合溫度之選擇、溶液聚合法中之聚合溶劑之種類或使用量之選擇、光聚合法中之光照射強度之選擇等。業者可理解基於包含下述具體例之本案說明書之記載及本案申請時之技術常識,如何獲得具有所需分子量之聚合物。As a method for adjusting the molecular weight of polymer (B), various previously known methods, including the use of the aforementioned chain transfer agent, may be used alone or in appropriate combinations. The same applies to the molecular weight of polymer (A). Non-limiting examples of such methods include the selection of the polymerization method, the type or amount of the polymerization initiator, the polymerization temperature, the type or amount of the polymerization solvent in solution polymerization, and the light intensity in photopolymerization. Operators can understand how to obtain a polymer with the desired molecular weight based on the description in this specification, including the specific examples below, and the technical knowledge at the time of this application.

此處所揭示之補強用膜中,相對於聚合物(A)之使用量100重量份,聚合物(B)之使用量例如可設為0.1重量份以上,就獲得更高效果(適宜為貼附初期之輕剝離性)之觀點而言,較佳為0.5重量份以上,更佳為1重量份以上,進而較佳為1.5重量份以上,亦可設為2重量份以上。於若干態樣中,就提高二次加工性等觀點而言,上述聚合物(B)之使用量例如可設為3重量份以上,可設為4重量份以上,亦可設為5重量份以上。又,相對於聚合物(A)之使用量100重量份,聚合物(B)之使用量例如可為75重量份以下,可為30重量份以下,可為10重量份以下,亦可為8重量份以下。就適宜實現目標之黏著力上升之觀點而言,於若干較佳態樣中,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,聚合物(B)之使用量為5重量份以下,更佳為4重量份以下,進而較佳為3重量份以下,尤佳為2.5重量份以下。於其他若干較佳態樣中,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,聚合物(B)之使用量為1.5重量份以下(例如1.2重量份以下)。藉由將聚合物(B)之使用量設為上述範圍,容易實現良好之彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力。又,可更好地兼顧貼附初期之輕剝離性與黏著力上升性。In the reinforcing film disclosed herein, relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A), the amount of polymer (B) used can be, for example, 0.1 parts by weight or more. From the viewpoint of obtaining a higher effect (suitable for easy peeling in the initial stage of adhesion), it is preferably 0.5 parts by weight or more, more preferably 1 part by weight or more, and even more preferably 1.5 parts by weight or more, and can also be 2 parts by weight or more. In several embodiments, from the viewpoint of improving secondary processingability, the amount of polymer (B) used can be, for example, 3 parts by weight or more, 4 parts by weight or more, and can also be 5 parts by weight or more. Furthermore, relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A), the amount of polymer (B) used can be, for example, 75 parts by weight or less, 30 parts by weight or less, 10 parts by weight or less, and 8 parts by weight or less. From the perspective of achieving the desired increase in adhesive strength, in several preferred embodiments, the amount of polymer (B) used relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A) is 5 parts by weight or less, more preferably 4 parts by weight or less, further preferably 3 parts by weight or less, and even more preferably 2.5 parts by weight or less. In several other preferred embodiments, the amount of polymer (B) used relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A) is 1.5 parts by weight or less (e.g., 1.2 parts by weight or less). By setting the amount of polymer (B) within the above range, good flexural resilience and flexural holding power can be easily achieved. Furthermore, it is possible to better balance easy peeling in the initial stage of adhesion with the increase in adhesive strength.

黏著劑層於不會較大地損及此處所揭示之補強用膜之性能之範圍內,可視需要含有聚合物(A)及聚合物(B)以外之聚合物(任意聚合物)。此種任意聚合物之使用量通常適宜設為黏著劑層中所含之聚合物成分整體之20重量%以下,可為15重量%以下,可為10重量%以下。於若干態樣中,上述任意聚合物之使用量可為上述聚合物成分整體之5重量%以下,可為3重量%以下,亦可為1重量%以下。亦可為實質上不含聚合物(A)及聚合物(B)以外之聚合物之黏著劑層。The adhesive layer may contain polymers other than polymers (A) and (B) (any polymer) as needed, within a range that does not significantly impair the performance of the reinforcing film disclosed herein. The amount of such arbitrary polymer used is typically suitable to be 20% by weight or less, 15% by weight or less, or 10% by weight or less of the total polymer component contained in the adhesive layer. In some embodiments, the amount of the aforementioned arbitrary polymer may be 5% by weight or less, 3% by weight or less, or 1% by weight or less of the total polymer component. An adhesive layer that substantially does not contain polymers other than polymers (A) and (B) may also be used.

(交聯劑) 於黏著劑層中,可視需要使用交聯劑以調整凝聚力等。作為交聯劑,可使用黏著劑之領域公知之交聯劑,例如可例舉:環氧系交聯劑、異氰酸酯系交聯劑、聚矽氧系交聯劑、㗁唑啉系交聯劑、氮丙啶系交聯劑、矽烷系交聯劑、烷基醚化三聚氰胺系交聯劑、金屬螯合物系交聯劑等。適宜使用異氰酸酯系交聯劑、環氧系交聯劑、金屬螯合物系交聯劑。作為適宜地兼顧彎曲回復性與彎曲保持力之交聯劑,可良好地使用異氰酸酯系交聯劑。交聯劑可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。 (Crosslinking Agents) Crosslinking agents can be used in the adhesive layer as needed to adjust cohesion, etc. As crosslinking agents, those known in the field of adhesives can be used, such as: epoxy crosslinking agents, isocyanate crosslinking agents, polysiloxane crosslinking agents, aziridine crosslinking agents, silane crosslinking agents, alkyl etherified melamine crosslinking agents, and metal chelate crosslinking agents. Isocyanate crosslinking agents, epoxy crosslinking agents, and metal chelate crosslinking agents are particularly suitable. Isocyanate-based crosslinkers are suitable crosslinkers that balance flexural recovery and flexural retention. Crosslinkers can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

作為異氰酸酯系交聯劑,可良好地使用多官能異氰酸酯(意指每1分子平均具有2個以上之異氰酸基之化合物,包括具有異氰尿酸酯結構者)。異氰酸酯系交聯劑可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。As an isocyanate crosslinking agent, it can be used well with polyfunctional isocyanates (meaning compounds with an average of more than two isocyanate groups per molecule, including those with isocyanurate structures). Isocyanate crosslinking agents can be used alone or in combination with two or more.

作為多官能異氰酸酯之例,可例舉:脂肪族多異氰酸酯類、脂環族多異氰酸酯類、芳香族多異氰酸酯類等。 作為脂肪族多異氰酸酯類之具體例,可例舉:1,2-伸乙基二異氰酸酯;1,2-四亞甲基二異氰酸酯、1,3-四亞甲基二異氰酸酯、1,4-四亞甲基二異氰酸酯等四亞甲基二異氰酸酯;1,2-六亞甲基二異氰酸酯、1,3-六亞甲基二異氰酸酯、1,4-六亞甲基二異氰酸酯、1,5-六亞甲基二異氰酸酯、1,6-六亞甲基二異氰酸酯、2,5-六亞甲基二異氰酸酯等六亞甲基二異氰酸酯;2-甲基-1,5-戊烷二異氰酸酯、3-甲基-1,5-戊烷二異氰酸酯、離胺酸二異氰酸酯等。 Examples of polyfunctional isocyanates include: aliphatic polyisocyanates, cycloaliphatic polyisocyanates, and aromatic polyisocyanates. Specific examples of aliphatic polyisocyanates include: 1,2-epenylethyl diisocyanate; tetramethylene diisocyanates such as 1,2-tetramethylene diisocyanate, 1,3-tetramethylene diisocyanate, and 1,4-tetramethylene diisocyanate; hexamethylene diisocyanates such as 1,2-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,3-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,4-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,5-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,6-hexamethylene diisocyanate, and 2,5-hexamethylene diisocyanate; 2-methyl-1,5-pentane diisocyanate, 3-methyl-1,5-pentane diisocyanate, and lysine diisocyanate.

作為脂環族多異氰酸酯類之具體例,可例舉:異佛爾酮二異氰酸酯;1,2-環己基二異氰酸酯、1,3-環己基二異氰酸酯、1,4-環己基二異氰酸酯等環己基二異氰酸酯;1,2-環戊基二異氰酸酯、1,3-環戊基二異氰酸酯等環戊基二異氰酸酯;氫化苯二甲基二異氰酸酯、氫化甲苯二異氰酸酯、氫化二苯基甲烷二異氰酸酯、氫化四甲基二甲苯二異氰酸酯、4,4'-二環己基甲烷二異氰酸酯等。Specific examples of alicyclic polyisocyanates include: isophorone diisocyanate; cyclohexyl diisocyanates such as 1,2-cyclohexyl diisocyanate, 1,3-cyclohexyl diisocyanate, and 1,4-cyclohexyl diisocyanate; cyclopentyl diisocyanates such as 1,2-cyclopentyl diisocyanate and 1,3-cyclopentyl diisocyanate; hydrogenated phenyl dimethyl diisocyanate, hydrogenated toluene diisocyanate, hydrogenated diphenylmethane diisocyanate, hydrogenated tetramethylxylene diisocyanate, and 4,4'-dicyclohexylmethane diisocyanate.

作為芳香族多異氰酸酯類之具體例,可例舉:2,4-甲苯二異氰酸酯、2,6-甲苯二異氰酸酯、4,4'-二苯基甲烷二異氰酸酯、2,4'-二苯基甲烷二異氰酸酯、2,2'-二苯基甲烷二異氰酸酯、4,4'-二苯基醚二異氰酸酯、2-硝基二苯基-4,4'-二異氰酸酯、2,2'-二苯基丙烷-4,4'-二異氰酸酯、3,3'-二甲基二苯基甲烷-4,4'-二異氰酸酯、4,4'-二苯基丙烷二異氰酸酯、間苯二異氰酸酯、對苯二異氰酸酯、伸萘基-1,4-二異氰酸酯、伸萘基-1,5-二異氰酸酯、3,3'-二甲氧基二苯基-4,4'-二異氰酸酯、苯二甲基-1,4-二異氰酸酯、苯二甲基-1,3-二異氰酸酯等。Specific examples of aromatic polyisocyanates include: 2,4-toluene diisocyanate, 2,6-toluene diisocyanate, 4,4'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, 2,4'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, 2,2'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, 4,4'-diphenyl ether diisocyanate, 2-nitrodiphenyl-4,4'-diisocyanate, and 2,2'-diphenylpropane-4,4'-diisocyanate. Cyanides, 3,3'-dimethyldiphenylmethane-4,4'-diisocyanate, 4,4'-diphenylpropane diisocyanate, isophenyl diisocyanate, terephthalic diisocyanate, naphthyl-1,4-diisocyanate, naphthyl-1,5-diisocyanate, 3,3'-dimethoxydiphenyl-4,4'-diisocyanate, phenyldimethyl-1,4-diisocyanate, phenyldimethyl-1,3-diisocyanate, etc.

作為較佳之多官能異氰酸酯,可例示每1分子平均具有3個以上之異氰酸基之多官能異氰酸酯。該3官能以上之異氰酸酯可為2官能或3官能以上之異氰酸酯之多聚物(例如二聚物或三聚物)、衍生物(例如多元醇與2分子以上之多官能異氰酸酯之加成反應產物)、聚合物等。例如可例舉:二苯基甲烷二異氰酸酯之二聚物或三聚物、六亞甲基二異氰酸酯之異氰尿酸酯體(異氰尿酸酯結構之三聚物加成物)、三羥甲基丙烷與甲苯二異氰酸酯之反應產物、三羥甲基丙烷與六亞甲基二異氰酸酯之反應產物、苯二甲基二異氰酸酯之三羥甲基丙烷加成物、異佛爾酮二異氰酸酯之三羥甲基丙烷加成物、六亞甲基二異氰酸酯之三羥甲基丙烷加成物、多亞甲基多苯基異氰酸酯、聚醚多異氰酸酯、聚酯多異氰酸酯、以及其等與各種多元醇之加成物、利用異氰尿酸酯鍵、縮二脲鍵、脲基甲酸酯鍵等而多官能化之多異氰酸酯等多官能異氰酸酯。As preferred polyfunctional isocyanates, examples include polyfunctional isocyanates having an average of three or more isocyanate groups per molecule. These trifunctional or higher isocyanates can be polymers (e.g., dimers or trimers) of difunctional or trifunctional or higher isocyanates, derivatives (e.g., products of addition reactions of polyols with two or more molecules of polyfunctional isocyanates), polymers, etc. Examples include: dimers or trimers of diphenylmethane diisocyanate, isocyanurates of hexamethylene diisocyanate (trimeric adducts of isocyanurate structures), reaction products of trimethylolpropane and toluene diisocyanate, reaction products of trimethylolpropane and hexamethylene diisocyanate, trimethylolpropane adducts of phenyl diisocyanate, and isoflavones. Trimethylolpropane adduct of ketone diisocyanate, trimethylolpropane adduct of hexamethylene diisocyanate, polymethylene polyphenyl isocyanate, polyether polyisocyanate, polyester polyisocyanate, and their adducts with various polyols, as well as polyisocyanates that are multifunctionalized by means of isocyanurate bonds, biuret bonds, urethane bonds, etc., are all polyfunctional isocyanates.

作為上述多官能異氰酸酯之市售品,可例舉:旭化成化學公司製造之商品名「Duranate TPA-100」;Tosoh公司製造之商品名「Coronate L」、「Coronate HL」、「Coronate HK」、「Coronate HX」、「Coronate 2096」;三井化學公司製造之商品名「Takenate D110N」、「Takenate D120N」、「Takenate D140N」、「Takenate D160N」等。Examples of commercially available polyfunctional isocyanates include: Asahi Kasei Chemicals' "Duranate TPA-100"; Tosoh's "Coronate L", "Coronate HL", "Coronate HK", "Coronate HX", and "Coronate 2096"; and Mitsui Chemicals' "Takenate D110N", "Takenate D120N", "Takenate D140N", and "Takenate D160N".

作為環氧系交聯劑,可例舉:雙酚A、表氯醇型環氧系樹脂、伸乙基縮水甘油醚、聚乙二醇二縮水甘油醚、甘油二縮水甘油醚、甘油三縮水甘油醚、1,6-己二醇縮水甘油醚、三羥甲基丙烷三縮水甘油醚、二縮水甘油基苯胺、二胺縮水甘油胺、N,N,N',N'-四縮水甘油基間苯二甲胺及1,3-雙(N,N-二縮水甘油基胺基甲基)環己烷等。該等可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。Examples of epoxy crosslinking agents include: bisphenol A, epichlorohydrin-type epoxy resins, ethyl glycidyl ether, polyethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, glyceryl diglycidyl ether, glyceryl triglycidyl ether, 1,6-hexanediol glycidyl ether, trihydroxymethylpropane triglycidyl ether, diglycidyl aniline, diamine glycidylamine, N,N,N',N'-tetraglycidyl m-phenylenediamine, and 1,3-bis(N,N-diglycidylaminomethyl)cyclohexane. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

關於金屬螯合物化合物,作為金屬成分,可例舉鋁、鐵、錫、鈦、鎳等,作為螯合物成分,可例舉乙炔、乙醯乙酸甲酯、乳酸乙酯等。該等可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。Regarding metal chelate compounds, examples of metal components include aluminum, iron, tin, titanium, and nickel, while examples of chelate components include acetylene, methyl acetate, and ethyl lactate. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

使用交聯劑之情形時之使用量並無特別限定,例如相對於聚合物(A)100重量份可設為超過0重量份之量。又,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,交聯劑之使用量例如可設為0.01重量份以上,較佳為設為0.05重量份以上。藉由增大交聯劑之使用量,貼附初期之黏著力得到抑制,有二次加工性提高之傾向。有彎曲回復性、加工性優異之傾向。於若干態樣中,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,交聯劑之使用量可為0.1重量份以上,可為0.5重量份以上,亦可為0.8重量份以上。另一方面,就適度容許聚合物(B)之移動性而獲得加熱後之黏著力上升之觀點而言,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,交聯劑之使用量通常適宜設為15重量份以下,可設為10重量份以下,亦可設為5重量份以下。There is no particular limitation on the amount of crosslinking agent used, for example, it can be more than 0 parts by weight relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A). Furthermore, the amount of crosslinking agent used relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A) can be, for example, 0.01 parts by weight or more, preferably 0.05 parts by weight or more. By increasing the amount of crosslinking agent used, the initial adhesion force is suppressed, and there is a tendency to improve secondary processing properties. It also tends to have excellent flexibility and processability. In several samples, the amount of crosslinking agent used relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A) can be 0.1 parts by weight or more, 0.5 parts by weight or more, or 0.8 parts by weight or more. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of allowing appropriate mobility of polymer (B) to obtain an increase in adhesive force after heating, the amount of crosslinking agent used is usually appropriate to be set to 15 parts by weight or less, or 10 parts by weight or less, or 5 parts by weight or less, relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A).

此處所揭示之技術可以至少使用異氰酸酯系交聯劑作為交聯劑之態樣良好地實施。就兼顧貼附初期之良好二次加工性與加熱後之黏著力上升之觀點而言,於若干態樣中,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,異氰酸酯系交聯劑之使用量例如可設為0.01重量份以上,較佳為0.05重量份以上,更佳為0.07重量份以上,可設為0.10重量份以上,亦可設為0.15重量份以上(例如0.20重量份以上)。藉由增大異氰酸酯系交聯劑之使用量,可獲得適度之凝聚力、彈性模數,有彎曲回復性、加工性亦優異之傾向。又,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,異氰酸酯系交聯劑之使用量例如可設為5重量份以下,較佳為未達1.0重量份,更佳為未達0.5重量份,進而較佳為未達0.3重量份,尤佳為未達0.2重量份(例如0.15重量份以下)。藉此,黏著劑之凝聚力、進而彈性模數(典型的是表面彈性模數)適度降低,可獲得良好之彎曲保持力,且亦容易獲得加熱後之黏著力上升。The technique disclosed herein can be well implemented in at least the form using an isocyanate-based crosslinker as the crosslinking agent. From the viewpoint of balancing good secondary processability in the initial stage of adhesion with an increase in adhesion after heating, in several forms, the amount of isocyanate-based crosslinker used relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A) can be set to, for example, 0.01 parts by weight or more, preferably 0.05 parts by weight or more, more preferably 0.07 parts by weight or more, and can be set to 0.10 parts by weight or more, or can be set to 0.15 parts by weight or more (e.g., 0.20 parts by weight or more). By increasing the amount of isocyanate-based crosslinker used, suitable cohesive strength and elastic modulus can be obtained, with a tendency for excellent flexural resilience and processability. Furthermore, relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A), the amount of isocyanate-based crosslinker used can be set to, for example, less than 5 parts by weight, preferably less than 1.0 parts by weight, more preferably less than 0.5 parts by weight, further preferably less than 0.3 parts by weight, and even more preferably less than 0.2 parts by weight (e.g., less than 0.15 parts by weight). This moderately reduces the cohesive force of the adhesive, and consequently its elastic modulus (typically surface elastic modulus), resulting in good flexural retention and easier attainment of increased adhesive force upon heating.

於黏著劑層含有含羥基單體作為單體單元之構成中使用異氰酸酯系交聯劑之情形時,黏著劑層所含之異氰酸基與羥基之莫耳比([NCO]/[OH])例如可設為0.001以上,但並無特別限定。藉由如此增加相對於含羥基單體之異氰酸酯系交聯劑之使用量,黏著劑之彈性模數(典型的是表面彈性模數)成為適宜範圍,有彎曲回復性提高之傾向。又,有加工性亦優異之傾向。於若干較佳態樣中,上述莫耳比([NCO]/[OH])為0.002以上,更佳為0.004以上,進而較佳為0.006以上(例如0.007以上),可為0.010以上,可為0.020以上,亦可為0.030以上。又,上述莫耳比([NCO]/[OH])例如可設為1.0以下,亦可為0.10以下。藉由將上述莫耳比限制為規定值以下,可良好地形成適於使加熱後黏著力相對於貼附初期之黏著力大幅地上升之交聯結構。於若干較佳態樣中,上述莫耳比([NCO]/[OH])為0.030以下,更佳為0.015以下,進而較佳為0.012以下(例如0.009以下),亦可為0.005以下。再者,黏著劑層中,異氰酸基與羥基可以其等之至少一部分化學鍵結(交聯)之狀態存在。更具體而言,上述異氰酸基可以與上述羥基化學鍵結(交聯)之狀態存在。另一方面,上述羥基可以其一部分與異氰酸基化學鍵結,另一部分不與上述異氰酸基化學鍵結(交聯)之狀態存在。When an isocyanate-based crosslinker is used in an adhesive layer containing hydroxyl-containing monomers as monomer units, the molar ratio ([NCO]/[OH]) of the isocyanate groups to hydroxyl groups in the adhesive layer can be set to, for example, 0.001 or higher, but is not particularly limited. By increasing the amount of isocyanate-based crosslinker relative to the hydroxyl-containing monomers, the elastic modulus of the adhesive (typically the surface elastic modulus) becomes suitable, tending to improve flexural resilience. Furthermore, it tends to have excellent processability. In several preferred embodiments, the molar ratio ([NCO]/[OH]) is 0.002 or higher, more preferably 0.004 or higher, and even more preferably 0.006 or higher (e.g., 0.007 or higher), and may be 0.010 or higher, 0.020 or higher, or 0.030 or higher. Furthermore, the molar ratio ([NCO]/[OH]) may, for example, be 1.0 or lower, or 0.10 or lower. By limiting the molar ratio to a specified value or lower, a cross-linking structure suitable for significantly increasing the adhesive force after heating relative to the initial adhesive force can be well formed. In several preferred embodiments, the molar ratio ([NCO]/[OH]) is 0.030 or less, more preferably 0.015 or less, and even more preferably 0.012 or less (e.g., 0.009 or less), or 0.005 or less. Furthermore, in the adhesive layer, the isocyanate group and the hydroxyl group can be chemically bonded (cross-linked) in at least a portion of their respective states. More specifically, the isocyanate group can be chemically bonded (cross-linked) with the hydroxyl group. On the other hand, the hydroxyl group can exist in a state where a portion is chemically bonded to the isocyanate group, and the other portion is not chemically bonded (cross-linked) with the isocyanate group.

於若干較佳態樣中,黏著劑層包含觸媒。添加觸媒之目的可為,於形成黏著劑層時促進黏著劑層之硬化,典型的是使上述任一交聯反應更有效地進行。因此,上述觸媒亦稱為硬化觸媒或交聯觸媒。藉由添加觸媒,可促進初期硬化,抑制導致黏著劑層表面產生氣泡之副反應。作為觸媒,可例舉:鐵系觸媒、錫系觸媒、鈦系觸媒、鋯系觸媒、鉛系觸媒、鈷系觸媒、鋅系觸媒等有機金屬系化合物、三級胺化合物等。其等可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。其中,就反應速度與適用期之平衡而言,較佳為鐵系觸媒、錫系觸媒,尤佳為鐵系觸媒。In several preferred embodiments, the adhesive layer contains a catalyst. The purpose of adding a catalyst is to promote the hardening of the adhesive layer during its formation, typically by making any of the aforementioned cross-linking reactions more efficient. Therefore, the aforementioned catalyst is also called a hardening catalyst or a cross-linking catalyst. By adding a catalyst, initial hardening can be promoted, and side reactions that cause bubble formation on the adhesive layer surface can be suppressed. Examples of catalysts include: iron-based catalysts, tin-based catalysts, titanium-based catalysts, zirconium-based catalysts, lead-based catalysts, cobalt-based catalysts, zinc-based catalysts, and other organometallic compounds, tertiary amine compounds, etc. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more. In terms of balancing reaction speed and service life, iron-based catalysts and tin-based catalysts are preferred, with iron-based catalysts being the most preferred.

作為鐵系觸媒,例如可例舉乙醯丙酮酸鐵、2-乙基己酸鐵等。鐵系觸媒可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。Examples of iron-based catalysts include ferric acetopyruvate and ferric 2-ethylhexanoate. Iron-based catalysts can be used alone or in combination with two or more other catalysts.

作為錫系觸媒,例如可例舉:二氯化二丁基錫、氧化二丁基錫、二溴化二丁基錫、順丁烯二酸二丁基錫、二月桂酸二丁基錫、二乙酸二丁基錫、硫化二丁基錫、三丁基甲醇錫、乙酸三丁基錫、三乙基乙醇錫、三丁基乙醇錫、氧化二辛基錫、二月桂酸二辛基錫、氯化三丁基錫、三氯乙酸三丁基錫、2-乙基己酸錫等。錫系觸媒可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。Examples of tin-based catalysts include: dibutyltin dichloride, dibutyltin oxide, dibutyltin dibromide, dibutyltin citrate, dibutyltin dilaurate, dibutyltin diacetate, dibutyltin sulfide, tributylmethanol tin, tributyltin acetate, triethylethanol tin, tributylethanol tin, dioctyltin oxide, dioctyltin dilaurate, tributyltin chloride, tributyltin trichloroacetic acid, and tin 2-ethylhexanoate. Tin-based catalysts can be used alone or in combination with two or more other catalysts.

觸媒之使用量並無特別限制,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,例如可設為0.0001重量份以上,較佳為0.001重量份以上,更佳為0.003重量份以上,進而較佳為0.006重量份以上,尤佳為0.008重量份以上。藉由使用適量觸媒,可抑制黏著劑層產生氣泡,容易獲得平滑之黏著面。又,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,觸媒之使用量例如可設為1重量份以下,亦可為0.1重量份以下。於若干較佳態樣中,相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,觸媒之使用量為0.03重量份以下,更佳為0.02重量份以下,進而較佳為0.01重量份以下,亦可為0.005重量份以下。藉由適度限制相對於聚合物(A)100重量份之觸媒之含量,容易實現適宜之黏著力上升。There is no particular limitation on the amount of catalyst used. For example, it can be set to 0.0001 parts by weight or more, preferably 0.001 parts by weight or more, more preferably 0.003 parts by weight or more, further preferably 0.006 parts by weight or more, and most preferably 0.008 parts by weight or more, relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A). By using an appropriate amount of catalyst, the formation of bubbles in the adhesive layer can be suppressed, making it easier to obtain a smooth adhesive surface. Furthermore, the amount of catalyst used can be set to less than 1 part by weight, or even less than 0.1 parts by weight, relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A). In several preferred embodiments, the amount of catalyst used relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A) is 0.03 parts by weight or less, more preferably 0.02 parts by weight or less, even more preferably 0.01 parts by weight or less, and also 0.005 parts by weight or less. By appropriately limiting the amount of catalyst relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A), a suitable increase in adhesion can be easily achieved.

於黏著劑層含有含羥基單體作為單體單元之構成中使用觸媒之情形時,觸媒之使用量可設為黏著劑層所含之觸媒與羥基之莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])為例如1.0×10 -6以上的量,係上述莫耳比較佳為1.0×10 -5以上,更佳為1.0×10 -4以上,進而較佳為2.0×10 -4以上,尤佳為3.0×10 -4以上的量,但並無特別限定。藉由使用適量觸媒,可抑制黏著劑層產生氣泡,容易獲得平滑之黏著面。又,上述莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])例如可設為5.0×10 -2以下,亦可為5.0×10 -3以下。於若干較佳態樣中,上述莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])為3.0×10 -3以下,更佳為1.0×10 -3以下,進而較佳為5.0×10 -4以下,亦可為3.0×10 -4以下。藉由適度限制觸媒之含量,容易實現適宜之黏著力上升。 When a catalyst is used in an adhesive layer containing hydroxyl-containing monomers as monomer units, the amount of catalyst used can be set such that the molar ratio of the catalyst to the hydroxyl group in the adhesive layer ([catalyst]/[OH]) is, for example, 1.0 × 10⁻⁶ or more. Preferably, the molar ratio is 1.0 × 10⁻⁵ or more, more preferably 1.0 × 10⁻⁴ or more, further preferably 2.0 × 10⁻⁴ or more, and even more preferably 3.0 × 10⁻⁴ or more, but there are no particular limitations. By using an appropriate amount of catalyst, the formation of bubbles in the adhesive layer can be suppressed, and a smooth adhesive surface can be easily obtained. Furthermore, the aforementioned molar ratio ([catalyst]/[OH]) can be set to 5.0 × 10⁻² or less, or even 5.0 × 10⁻³ or less. In several preferred embodiments, the aforementioned molar ratio ([catalyst]/[OH]) is 3.0 × 10⁻³ or less, more preferably 1.0 × 10⁻³ or less, and even more preferably 5.0 × 10⁻⁴ or less, or even 3.0 × 10⁻⁴ or less. By appropriately limiting the catalyst content, a suitable increase in adhesive force can be easily achieved.

(黏著賦予樹脂) 黏著劑層中可視需要含有黏著賦予樹脂。作為黏著賦予樹脂,並無特別限制,例如可例舉:松香系黏著賦予樹脂、萜烯系黏著賦予樹脂、酚系黏著賦予樹脂、烴系黏著賦予樹脂、酮系黏著賦予樹脂、聚醯胺系黏著賦予樹脂、環氧系黏著賦予樹脂、彈性體系黏著賦予樹脂等。黏著賦予樹脂可單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上使用。 (Adhesive-Enhancing Resins) Adhesive layers may contain adhesive-enhancing resins as needed. There are no particular limitations on the type of adhesive-enhancing resin; examples include: rosin-based adhesive-enhancing resins, terpene-based adhesive-enhancing resins, phenolic adhesive-enhancing resins, hydrocarbon-based adhesive-enhancing resins, ketone-based adhesive-enhancing resins, polyamide-based adhesive-enhancing resins, epoxy-based adhesive-enhancing resins, and elastomer-based adhesive-enhancing resins. Adhesive-enhancing resins can be used alone or in combination with two or more.

黏著賦予樹脂之含量並無特別限定,可以根據目的或用途而發揮適當之黏著性能之方式設定。相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,黏著賦予樹脂之含量(於含有兩種以上之黏著賦予樹脂之情形時為其等之合計量)例如可設為5~500重量份左右。又,此處所揭示之技術可以限制黏著賦予樹脂之使用量之態樣良好地實施。例如相對於聚合物(A)100重量份,黏著賦予樹脂之含量可設為未達20重量份,可未達10重量份,可未達3重量份,可未達1重量份(0重量份~未達1重量份),於若干態樣中,黏著劑層實質上不含黏著賦予樹脂。The content of adhesive resin is not particularly limited and can be set according to the purpose or application to achieve appropriate adhesive properties. The content of adhesive resin (total amount when two or more adhesive resins are present) relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A) can be set, for example, to approximately 5 to 500 parts by weight. Furthermore, the technology disclosed herein allows for the effective implementation of variations in the amount of adhesive resin used. For example, the content of adhesive resin relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A) can be set to less than 20 parts by weight, less than 10 parts by weight, less than 3 parts by weight, or less than 1 part by weight (0 parts by weight to less than 1 part by weight), in several variations where the adhesive layer substantially does not contain adhesive resin.

此外,此處所揭示之技術中之黏著劑層亦可於不明顯妨礙本發明之效果之範圍內,視需要含有調平劑、塑化劑、軟化劑、著色劑(染料、顏料等)、填充劑、抗靜電劑、抗老化劑、紫外線吸收劑、抗氧化劑、光穩定劑、防腐劑等可用於黏著劑之公知添加劑。Furthermore, the adhesive layer in the technology disclosed herein may, as needed, contain leveling agents, plasticizers, softeners, colorants (dyes, pigments, etc.), fillers, antistatic agents, anti-aging agents, ultraviolet absorbers, antioxidants, light stabilizers, preservatives, and other known additives that can be used as adhesives, to a extent that does not significantly impair the effect of the invention.

此處所揭示之構成補強用膜之黏著劑層可為黏著劑組合物之硬化層。即,該黏著劑層可藉由將水分散型、溶劑型、光硬化型、熱熔型等黏著劑組合物賦予(例如塗佈)至適當表面後適當實施硬化處理而形成。於進行兩種以上之硬化處理(乾燥、交聯、聚合、冷卻等)之情形時,該等可同時、或多階段地進行。於使用單體原料之部分聚合物(聚合物漿液)之黏著劑組合物中,典型而言,作為上述硬化處理,進行最終之共聚反應。即,將部分聚合物供於進一步之共聚反應而形成完全聚合物。例如,若為光硬化性黏著劑組合物,則實施光照射。視需要亦可實施交聯、乾燥等硬化處理。例如於必須以光硬化性黏著劑組合物進行乾燥之情形時,於乾燥後進行光硬化即可。於使用完全聚合物之黏著劑組合物中,典型而言,作為上述硬化處理,視需要實施乾燥(加熱乾燥)、交聯等處理。The adhesive layer constituting the reinforcing film disclosed herein can be a hardened layer of the adhesive composition. That is, the adhesive layer can be formed by applying (e.g., coating) a water-dispersible, solvent-based, photocurable, or hot-melt adhesive composition to a suitable surface and then performing a curing treatment. When two or more curing treatments (drying, crosslinking, polymerization, cooling, etc.) are performed, these can be carried out simultaneously or in multiple stages. In adhesive compositions using a portion of a polymer (polymer slurry) of monomeric raw materials, typically, as a curing treatment, a final copolymerization reaction is carried out. That is, a portion of the polymer is subjected to a further copolymerization reaction to form a complete polymer. For example, if it is a photocurable adhesive composition, light irradiation is performed. Crosslinking, drying, or other curing treatments may also be performed as needed. For example, when drying is necessary for a light-curing adhesive composition, light curing can be performed after drying. In adhesive compositions using complete polymers, typically, as a curing treatment, drying (heat drying), crosslinking, or other treatments are performed as needed.

黏著劑組合物之塗佈例如可使用凹版輥式塗佈機、逆輥塗佈機、接觸輥塗佈機、浸漬輥塗機、棒式塗佈機、刮刀塗佈機、噴霧塗佈機等常用之塗佈機而實施。The coating of adhesive compositions can be carried out using commonly used coating machines such as gravure roller coating machines, reverse roller coating machines, contact roller coating machines, dip roller coating machines, rod coating machines, scraper coating machines, and spray coating machines.

黏著劑層之厚度並無特別限定,例如可設為6 μm以上。於若干態樣中,黏著劑層之厚度可為8 μm以上,可為10 μm以上,可為15 μm以上,亦可為20 μm以上或超過20 μm。藉由增大黏著劑層之厚度,有加熱後黏著力上升之傾向。又,於若干態樣中,黏著劑層之厚度例如可為300 μm以下,可為200 μm以下,可為150 μm以下,可為100 μm以下,可為70 μm以下,可為50 μm以下,亦可為40 μm以下。黏著劑層之厚度不過大就補強用膜之薄型化或防止黏著劑層之凝聚破壞等觀點而言可變得有利。具有厚度為上述範圍內之黏著劑層之補強用膜可實現黏著力等黏著特性或彎曲回復性、彎曲保持力之平衡。再者,於基材之第一面及第二面具有第一黏著劑層及第二黏著劑層之補強用膜之情形時,上述黏著劑層之厚度至少可適用於第一黏著劑層之厚度。第二黏著劑層之厚度亦可從相同之範圍選擇。又,於無基材之補強用膜之情形時,該補強用膜之厚度與黏著劑層之厚度一致。The thickness of the adhesive layer is not particularly limited; for example, it can be set to 6 μm or more. In several samples, the thickness of the adhesive layer can be 8 μm or more, 10 μm or more, 15 μm or more, or 20 μm or more. By increasing the thickness of the adhesive layer, there is a tendency for the adhesive force to increase after heating. Furthermore, in several samples, the thickness of the adhesive layer can be, for example, 300 μm or less, 200 μm or less, 150 μm or less, 100 μm or less, 70 μm or less, 50 μm or less, or 40 μm or less. A less excessively thick adhesive layer is advantageous from the perspectives of thinning the reinforcing film or preventing the adhesive layer from agglomerating and breaking down. A reinforcing film having an adhesive layer with a thickness within the aforementioned range can achieve a balance between adhesive properties such as adhesive strength and bending resilience and bending holding force. Furthermore, when a reinforcing film having a first adhesive layer and a second adhesive layer on both the first and second surfaces of a substrate is used, the thickness of the adhesive layer can be at least the same as the thickness of the first adhesive layer. The thickness of the second adhesive layer can also be selected from the same range. Moreover, in the case of a reinforcing film without a substrate, the thickness of the reinforcing film is the same as the thickness of the adhesive layer.

<支持基材> 若干態樣之補強用膜可為於支持基材之單面或雙面具備黏著劑層的附基材之黏著片材之形態。支持基材之材質並無特別限定,可根據補強用膜之使用目的或使用態樣等適當選擇。作為可使用之基材之非限定例,可例舉:塑膠膜等樹脂膜;聚胺基甲酸酯發泡體、聚乙烯發泡體、聚氯丁二烯發泡體等發泡體所構成之發泡體片材;各種纖維狀物質(可為麻、棉等天然纖維、聚酯、維尼綸等合成纖維、乙酸酯等半合成纖維等)之單一體或利用混紡等所形成之織布及不織布;日本紙、道林紙、牛皮紙、皺紋紙等紙類;鋁箔、銅箔等金屬箔等。亦可為由該等複合而成之構成之基材。作為此種複合基材之例,例如可例舉:積層有金屬箔與上述塑膠膜之結構之基材、玻璃布等經無機纖維強化之塑膠基材等。 <Supporting Substrate> Several types of reinforcing films may be in the form of adhesive sheets for attaching to a supporting substrate, with adhesive layers prepared on one or both sides of the supporting substrate. The material of the supporting substrate is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected according to the intended use or application of the reinforcing film. Non-limiting examples of usable substrates include: resin films such as plastic films; foam sheets composed of foams such as polyurethane foam, polyethylene foam, and polychloroprene foam; woven and non-woven fabrics formed from various fibrous materials (such as natural fibers like hemp and cotton, synthetic fibers like polyester and vinylon, and semi-synthetic fibers like acetate); paper types such as Japanese paper, woodfree paper, kraft paper, and wrinkled paper; and metal foils such as aluminum foil and copper foil. Substrates composed of composites of these materials are also possible. Examples of such composite substrates include: substrates with a structure consisting of a metal foil and the aforementioned plastic film, and plastic substrates reinforced with inorganic fibers, such as glass cloth.

作為此處所揭示之補強用膜之基材,可良好地使用各種膜基材。上述膜基材可為如發泡體膜或不織布片材等般多孔質之基材,可為非多孔質之基材,亦可為積層有多孔質層與非多孔質層之結構之基材。於若干態樣中,作為上述膜基材,可良好地使用包含能夠獨立地維持形狀之(自立型或非相關性之)樹脂膜作為基底膜者。此處所謂「樹脂膜」係指非多孔質之結構,且典型而言係指實質上不含氣泡之(無孔隙之)樹脂膜。因此,上述樹脂膜之概念區別於發泡體膜或不織布。作為上述樹脂膜,可良好地使用能夠獨立地維持形狀(自立型、或非相關性)者。上述樹脂膜可為單層結構,亦可為兩層以上之多層結構(例如三層結構)。Various membrane substrates can be used as the substrate for the reinforcing membrane disclosed herein. These membrane substrates can be porous substrates such as foamed membranes or non-woven sheets, non-porous substrates, or substrates with a structure consisting of both porous and non-porous layers. Among several embodiments, resin membranes capable of independently maintaining their shape (self-contained or independent) can be used as the base membrane as the aforementioned membrane substrate. Here, "resin membrane" refers to a non-porous structure, and typically refers to a resin membrane that is substantially bubble-free (non-porous). Therefore, the concept of a resin membrane differs from that of foamed membranes or non-woven fabrics. The resin film described above is well-suited for use as it can independently maintain its shape (either self-supporting or independent). The resin film can be a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure with two or more layers (e.g., a three-layer structure).

作為構成樹脂膜之樹脂材料,例如可例舉:聚酯、聚烯烴、尼龍6、尼龍66、部分芳香族聚醯胺等聚醯胺(PA)、聚醯亞胺(PI)、聚醯胺醯亞胺(PAI)、聚醚醚酮(PEEK)、聚醚碸(PES)、聚苯硫醚(PPS)、聚碳酸酯(PC)、聚胺基甲酸酯(PU)、乙烯-乙酸乙烯酯共聚物(EVA)、聚四氟乙烯(PTFE)等氟樹脂、丙烯酸系樹脂、聚丙烯酸酯、聚苯乙烯、聚氯乙烯、聚偏二氯乙烯等樹脂。上述樹脂膜可為使用單獨含有此種樹脂之一種之樹脂材料所形成者,亦可為使用摻合有兩種以上之樹脂材料所形成者。上述樹脂膜可未經延伸,亦可為經延伸(例如單軸延伸或雙軸延伸)者。Examples of resin materials constituting resin films include: polyester, polyolefins, nylon 6, nylon 66, polyamides (PA) such as some aromatic polyamides, polyimide (PI), polyamide-imide (PAI), polyetheretherketone (PEEK), polyether sulfide (PES), polyphenylene sulfide (PPS), polycarbonate (PC), polyurethane (PU), ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer (EVA), polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and other fluororesins, acrylic resins, polyacrylates, polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinylidene chloride, and other resins. The aforementioned resin films can be formed using a resin material containing only one of these resins, or they can be formed using a mixture of two or more resin materials. The resin membrane may be unstretched or stretched (e.g., uniaxial or biaxial stretching).

作為構成樹脂膜之樹脂材料之較佳例,可例舉聚醯亞胺系樹脂、聚酯系樹脂、PPS樹脂及聚烯烴系樹脂。此處,聚醯亞胺系樹脂係指以超過50重量%之比率含有聚醯亞胺之樹脂。同樣,聚酯系樹脂係指以超過50重量%之比率含有聚酯之樹脂,PPS樹脂係指以超過50重量%之比率含有PPS之樹脂,聚烯烴系樹脂係指以超過50重量%之比率含有聚烯烴之樹脂。Preferred examples of resin materials constituting resin films include polyimide resins, polyester resins, PPS resins, and polyolefin resins. Here, polyimide resins refer to resins containing polyimide in a ratio of more than 50% by weight. Similarly, polyester resins refer to resins containing polyester in a ratio of more than 50% by weight, PPS resins refer to resins containing PPS in a ratio of more than 50% by weight, and polyolefin resins refer to resins containing polyolefins in a ratio of more than 50% by weight.

作為聚酯系樹脂之具體例,可例舉:聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯(PET)、聚對苯二甲酸丁二酯(PBT)、聚萘二甲酸乙二酯(PEN)、聚萘二甲酸丁二酯等。Specific examples of polyester resins include: polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polybutylene terephthalate (PBT), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), and polybutylene naphthalate.

作為聚烯烴樹脂,可單獨使用一種聚烯烴、或將兩種以上之聚烯烴組合而使用。該聚烯烴例如可為α-烯烴之均聚物、兩種以上之α-烯烴之共聚物、一種或兩種以上之α-烯烴與其他乙烯基單體之共聚物等。作為具體例,可例舉:聚乙烯(PE)、聚丙烯(PP)、聚-1-丁烯、聚-4-甲基-1-戊烯、乙烯丙烯橡膠(EPR)等乙烯-丙烯共聚物、乙烯-丙烯-丁烯共聚物、乙烯-丁烯共聚物、乙烯-乙烯醇共聚物、乙烯-丙烯酸乙酯共聚物等。可使用低密度(LD)聚烯烴及高密度(HD)聚烯烴之任一者。作為聚烯烴樹脂膜之例,可例舉:未延伸聚丙烯(CPP)膜、雙軸延伸聚丙烯(OPP)膜、低密度聚乙烯(LDPE)膜、直鏈狀低密度聚乙烯(LLDPE)膜、中密度聚乙烯(MDPE)膜、高密度聚乙烯(HDPE)膜、摻合有兩種以上之聚乙烯(PE)之聚乙烯(PE)膜、摻合有聚丙烯(PP)與聚乙烯(PE)之PP/PE摻合膜等。As a polyolefin resin, a single polyolefin can be used alone, or a combination of two or more polyolefins can be used. The polyolefin can be, for example, a homopolymer of α-olefins, a copolymer of two or more α-olefins, or a copolymer of one or more α-olefins with other vinyl monomers. Specific examples include: polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), poly-1-butene, poly-4-methyl-1-pentene, ethylene-propylene rubber (EPR) and other ethylene-propylene copolymers, ethylene-propylene-butene copolymers, ethylene-butene copolymers, ethylene-vinyl alcohol copolymers, ethylene-ethyl acrylate copolymers, etc. Both low-density (LD) and high-density (HD) polyolefins can be used. Examples of polyolefin resin films include: unstretched polypropylene (CPP) film, biaxially stretched polypropylene (OPP) film, low-density polyethylene (LDPE) film, linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE) film, medium-density polyethylene (MDPE) film, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) film, polyethylene (PE) film containing two or more types of polyethylene (PE), and PP/PE composite film containing polypropylene (PP) and polyethylene (PE), etc.

作為可良好地用作此處所揭示之補強用膜之基底膜之樹脂膜之具體例,可例舉PI膜、PET膜、PEN膜、PPS膜、PEEK膜、CPP膜及OPP膜。Examples of resin films that can be well used as base films for the reinforcing films disclosed herein include PI films, PET films, PEN films, PPS films, PEEK films, CPP films and OPP films.

於樹脂膜中,可於不明顯妨礙本發明之效果之範圍內,視需要調配光穩定劑、抗氧化劑、抗靜電劑、著色劑(染料、顏料等)、填充材、滑澤劑、抗黏連劑等公知之添加劑。添加劑之調配量並無特別限定,可根據目的等適當設定。Within the resin film, known additives such as light stabilizers, antioxidants, antistatic agents, colorants (dyes, pigments, etc.), fillers, lubricants, and antiblocking agents can be added as needed, within a range that does not significantly impair the effects of the invention. The amount of additives added is not particularly limited and can be appropriately set according to the intended purpose.

樹脂膜之製造方法並無特別限定。例如可適當採用擠出成形、吹脹成形、T模壓鑄成形、砑光輥成形等先前公知之一般之樹脂膜成形方法。There are no particular limitations on the manufacturing method of resin films. For example, commonly known resin film forming methods such as extrusion molding, blow molding, T-die casting, and burnishing roll forming can be appropriately adopted.

上述基材可為實質上由此種基底膜構成者。或者,上述基材亦可為除了包含上述基底膜以外,還包含輔助層者。作為上述輔助層之例,可例舉:光學特性調整層(例如著色層、抗反射層)、用以對基材賦予所需之外觀之印刷層或層壓層、抗靜電層、底塗層、剝離層等表面處理層。The aforementioned substrate may be substantially composed of such a base film. Alternatively, the aforementioned substrate may also include auxiliary layers in addition to the aforementioned base film. Examples of such auxiliary layers include: optical property adjustment layers (e.g., coloring layers, anti-reflective layers), printed layers or laminated layers used to impart the desired appearance to the substrate, antistatic layers, primer layers, release layers, and other surface treatment layers.

基材之厚度並無特別限定,可根據補強用膜之使用目的或使用態樣等而選擇。基材之厚度例如可為1000 μm以下。於若干態樣中,就補強用膜之操作性或加工性之觀點而言,基材之厚度例如可為500 μm以下,可為300 μm以下,可為250 μm以下,亦可為200 μm以下。就應用補強用膜之製品之小型化或輕量化之觀點而言,於若干態樣中,基材之厚度例如可為160 μm以下,可為130 μm以下,可為100 μm以下,可為90 μm以下,可為80 μm以下,可為60 μm以下,可為50 μm以下,可為25 μm以下,可為10 μm以下,亦可為5 μm以下。若基材之厚度變小,則有補強用膜之柔軟性或對被黏著體之表面形狀之追隨性提高之傾向。又,就操作性或加工性等觀點而言,基材之厚度例如可為2 μm以上,可為5 μm以上,可為10 μm以上,可為20 μm以上,亦可為25 μm以上或超過25 μm。於若干態樣中,基材之厚度例如可為30 μm以上,可為35 μm以上,可為55 μm以上,可為70 μm以上,可為75 μm以上,可為90 μm以上,亦可為120 μm以上。例如,補強用膜中可良好地採用厚度30 μm以上之基材。The thickness of the substrate is not particularly limited and can be selected according to the intended use or application of the reinforcing film. For example, the substrate thickness can be 1000 μm or less. In some applications, from the viewpoint of operability or processability of the reinforcing film, the substrate thickness can be, for example, 500 μm or less, 300 μm or less, 250 μm or less, or 200 μm or less. From the viewpoint of miniaturization or weight reduction of products using the reinforcing film, in some applications, the substrate thickness can be, for example, 160 μm or less, 130 μm or less, 100 μm or less, 90 μm or less, 80 μm or less, 60 μm or less, 50 μm or less, 25 μm or less, 10 μm or less, or 5 μm or less. If the thickness of the substrate decreases, the flexibility of the reinforcing film or its ability to follow the surface shape of the adherend tends to increase. Furthermore, from the viewpoint of operability or processability, the thickness of the substrate can be, for example, 2 μm or more, 5 μm or more, 10 μm or more, 20 μm or more, 25 μm or more, or even more than 25 μm. In several cases, the thickness of the substrate can be, for example, 30 μm or more, 35 μm or more, 55 μm or more, 70 μm or more, 75 μm or more, 90 μm or more, or even 120 μm or more. For example, a substrate with a thickness of 30 μm or more can be well used in reinforcing films.

視需要亦可對基材之第一面實施電暈放電處理、電漿處理、紫外線照射處理、酸處理、鹼處理、利用底塗劑(primer)之塗佈形成底塗層等先前公知之表面處理。此種表面處理可為用於提高黏著劑層對基材之抓固性之處理。例如於具備含有樹脂膜作為基底膜之基材之補強用膜中,可良好地採用實施了該抓固性提高處理之基材。上述表面處理可單獨應用或組合應用。底塗層之形成所使用之底塗劑之組成並無特別限定,可自公知者中適當選擇。底塗層之厚度並無特別限制,通常適宜為0.01 μm~1 μm左右,較佳為0.1 μm~1 μm左右。作為視需要可對基材之第一面實施之其他處理,可例舉抗靜電層形成處理、著色層形成處理、印刷處理等。As needed, previously known surface treatments such as corona discharge treatment, plasma treatment, ultraviolet irradiation treatment, acid treatment, alkali treatment, and primer coating can also be applied to the first surface of the substrate. Such surface treatments can be used to improve the adhesion of the adhesive layer to the substrate. For example, in reinforcing films having a substrate containing a resin film as a base film, a substrate with this adhesion-enhancing treatment can be used effectively. The above surface treatments can be applied individually or in combination. The composition of the primer used to form the primer layer is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from those known to the public. There are no particular limitations on the thickness of the base coat, but it is usually suitable to be around 0.01 μm to 1 μm, and preferably around 0.1 μm to 1 μm. Other treatments that can be applied to the first surface of the substrate as needed include antistatic layer formation treatment, color layer formation treatment, and printing treatment.

於此處所揭示之補強用膜為僅於基材之第一面具有黏著劑層之單面黏著片材之形態之情形時,亦可對基材之第二面視需要實施剝離處理或抗靜電處理等先前公知之表面處理。例如可藉由利用剝離處理劑對基材背面進行表面處理(典型而言,藉由設置利用剝離處理劑所形成之剝離層),而使捲繞成捲筒狀之形態之補強用膜之解卷力變輕。作為剝離處理劑,可使用聚矽氧系剝離處理劑、長鏈烷基系剝離處理劑、烯烴系剝離處理劑、氟系剝離處理劑、脂肪酸醯胺系剝離處理劑、硫化鉬、二氧化矽粉等。又,亦可以提高印字性、降低光反射性、提高重疊貼合性等為目的,對基材之第二面實施電暈放電處理、電漿處理、紫外線照射處理、酸處理、鹼處理等處理。又,於雙面黏著片材之情形時,視需要亦可對基材之第二面實施與作為可對基材之第一面實施之表面處理於上文中所例示者相同之表面處理。再者,對基材之第一面實施之表面處理與對第二面實施之表面處理可相同亦可不同。When the reinforcing film disclosed herein is a single-sided adhesive sheet with an adhesive layer on the first side of the substrate, the second side of the substrate may also be subjected to previously known surface treatments such as peeling or antistatic treatment as needed. For example, by surface treating the back side of the substrate with a peeling agent (typically by providing a peeling layer formed by the peeling agent), the unwinding force of the reinforcing film wound into a roll shape can be reduced. As a peeling agent, polysiloxane-based peeling agents, long-chain alkyl-based peeling agents, olefin-based peeling agents, fluorinated peeling agents, fatty acid amide-based peeling agents, molybdenum sulfide, and silica powder can be used. Furthermore, to improve printability, reduce light reflectivity, and improve overlap adhesion, the second side of the substrate can be treated with corona discharge treatment, plasma treatment, ultraviolet irradiation treatment, acid treatment, or alkali treatment. In the case of double-sided adhesive sheets, the second side of the substrate can also be treated with the same surface treatments as those exemplified above, which can be applied to the first side of the substrate, as needed. Furthermore, the surface treatment applied to the first surface of the substrate can be the same as or different from the surface treatment applied to the second surface.

<補強用膜之特性> 此處所揭示之補強用膜較佳為將在貼合於不鏽鋼鋼板且於23℃下保持30分鐘後測得之初期黏著力N 23限制為規定值以下。於若干態樣中,黏著力N 23例如較佳為未達500 gf/25 mm,更佳為未達400 gf/25 mm,進而較佳為未達300 gf/25 mm,尤佳為250 gf/25 mm以下(例如200 gf/25 mm以下),亦可為150 gf/25 mm以下。黏著力N 23較低就二次加工性之觀點而言較佳。黏著力N 23之下限並無特別限制,例如可為1 gf/25 mm以上。就貼附於被黏著體之作業性、或防止黏著力上升前之位置偏移等觀點而言,黏著力N 23通常適宜為10 gf/25 mm以上。就提高加熱後黏著力等觀點而言,於若干態樣中,黏著力N 23例如可為20 gf/25 mm以上,可為50 gf/25 mm以上,可為80 gf/25 mm以上,亦可為100 gf/25 mm以上(例如150 gf/25 mm以上)。 <Characteristics of Reinforcing Films> The reinforcing films disclosed herein preferably have an initial adhesion strength N 23 , measured after being bonded to a stainless steel sheet and held at 23°C for 30 minutes, limited to a specified value or lower. In several samples, the adhesion strength N 23 is preferably less than 500 gf/25 mm, more preferably less than 400 gf/25 mm, further preferably less than 300 gf/25 mm, particularly preferably less than 250 gf/25 mm (e.g., less than 200 gf/25 mm), and may also be less than 150 gf/25 mm. Lower adhesion strength N 23 is preferable from the viewpoint of secondary processing. There is no particular limitation on the lower limit of adhesion strength N 23 , for example, it may be more than 1 gf/25 mm. From the perspective of ease of application to the substrate and prevention of positional shift before the adhesive force increases, an adhesive force N 23 is generally suitable to be 10 gf/25 mm or more. From the perspective of improving the adhesive force after heating, in several cases, the adhesive force N 23 may be, for example, 20 gf/25 mm or more, 50 gf/25 mm or more, 80 gf/25 mm or more, or 100 gf/25 mm or more (e.g., 150 gf/25 mm or more).

黏著力N 23[gf/25 mm]係藉由如下方式獲得,即,在壓接於作為被黏著體之不鏽鋼(SUS)板且於23℃、50%RH之環境下放置30分鐘後,於相同環境下(即23℃下),在剝離角度180度、拉伸速度300 mm/min之條件下測定180°剝離黏著力。被黏著體可使用SUS304BA板。測定時,可視需要於測定對象之補強用膜貼附適當之襯底材(例如厚度25 μm左右之PET膜)進行補強。黏著力N 23更具體而言可依據下述實施例所記載之初期黏著力之測定方法進行測定。 The adhesive force N 23 [gf/25 mm] is obtained by pressing the material onto a stainless steel (SUS) sheet (the substrate) at 23°C and 50%RH for 30 minutes. Then, under the same conditions (23°C), the 180° peel adhesive force is measured at a peel angle of 180° and a tensile speed of 300 mm/min. The substrate can be a SUS304BA sheet. During measurement, a suitable backing material (e.g., a PET film approximately 25 μm thick) can be applied to the reinforcing film of the test object for reinforcement, if necessary. More specifically, the adhesive force N 23 can be measured according to the initial adhesive force measurement method described in the following embodiments.

此處所揭示之補強用膜係藉由加熱使黏著力上升者,例如可為黏著力N 60、即在貼合於不鏽鋼鋼板且於60℃下保持60分鐘後在23℃下測得之黏著力顯示300 gf/25 mm以上者。於若干態樣中,黏著力N 60為400 gf/25 mm以上,適宜為500 gf/25 mm以上。滿足該特性之補強用膜在貼附於被黏著體後,藉由加熱使黏著力上升至規定值以上。根據此處所揭示之技術,可藉由加熱獲得強黏著力。於若干較佳態樣中,黏著力N 60為600 gf/25 mm以上,更佳為700 gf/25 mm以上,可為800 gf/25 mm以上,亦可為900 gf/25 mm以上。黏著力N 60之上限並無特別限制。就補強用膜之製造容易性或經濟性之觀點而言,於若干態樣中,黏著力N 60例如可為3000 gf/25 mm以下,可為1500 gf/25 mm以下,亦可為1000 gf/25 mm以下。 The reinforcing film disclosed herein increases its adhesive strength through heating. For example, it can achieve an adhesive strength N60 , meaning that after being bonded to a stainless steel sheet and held at 60°C for 60 minutes, the adhesive strength measured at 23°C shows 300 gf/25 mm or higher. In some samples, the adhesive strength N60 is 400 gf/25 mm or higher, and preferably 500 gf/25 mm or higher. The reinforcing film meeting this characteristic increases its adhesive strength to a specified value after being applied to the substrate through heating. According to the technology disclosed herein, strong adhesive strength can be obtained through heating. In several preferred embodiments, the adhesive strength N 60 is 600 gf/25 mm or more, more preferably 700 gf/25 mm or more, and may be 800 gf/25 mm or more, or may be 900 gf/25 mm or more. There is no particular upper limit to the adhesive strength N 60. From the viewpoint of ease of manufacture or economy of reinforcing films, in several embodiments, the adhesive strength N 60 may be, for example, 3000 gf/25 mm or less, 1500 gf/25 mm or less, or 1000 gf/25 mm or less.

黏著力N 60[gf/25 mm]係藉由如下方式獲得,即,在壓接於作為被黏著體之SUS板且在60℃環境下保持60分鐘,繼而於23℃、50%RH之環境下放置30分鐘,其後於相同環境下,在剝離角度180度、拉伸速度300 mm/min之條件下測定180°剝離黏著力。與黏著力N 23同樣,被黏著體可使用SUS304BA板。測定時,可視需要於測定對象之補強用膜貼附適當之襯底材(例如厚度25 μm左右之PET膜)進行補強。黏著力N 60更具體而言可依據下述實施例所記載之加熱後黏著力之測定方法進行測定。 The adhesion strength N 60 [gf/25 mm] was obtained by pressing the material onto an SUS board (the substrate) and holding it at 60°C for 60 minutes, followed by placing it at 23°C and 50%RH for 30 minutes. Then, under the same conditions, the 180° peel adhesion strength was measured at a peel angle of 180° and a tensile speed of 300 mm/min. Similar to adhesion strength N 23 , an SUS304BA board can be used as the substrate. During testing, a suitable backing material (e.g., a PET film approximately 25 μm thick) can be attached to the reinforcing film of the test object for reinforcement, if necessary. The adhesion force N 60 can be specifically determined according to the method for determining the adhesion force after heating as described in the following embodiments.

黏著力N 60[gf/25 mm]相對於黏著力N 23[gf/25 mm]之比、即黏著力上升比N 60/N 23並無特別限定,於若干態樣中,N 60/N 23適宜為1.5以上,較佳為2.0以上,更佳為2.5以上,進而較佳為3.0以上(例如3.5以上),亦可超過5.0(例如超過7.0)。藉由N 60/N 23較大之補強用膜,可於貼附初期顯示良好之二次加工性,且藉由其後之加熱等使黏著力大幅地上升。N 60/N 23之上限並無特別限定,通常為100以下,就補強用膜之製造容易性或經濟性之觀點而言,可為30以下,可為15以下,亦可為10以下。於若干態樣中,N 60/N 23例如可為5以下,可為3以下,亦可為2以下。 The ratio of adhesive force N60 [gf/25 mm] to adhesive force N23 [gf/25 mm], i.e., the adhesive force increase ratio N60 / N23 , is not particularly limited. In several samples, N60 / N23 is preferably 1.5 or higher, more preferably 2.0 or higher, even more preferably 2.5 or higher, and even more preferably 3.0 or higher (e.g., 3.5 or higher), and can also exceed 5.0 (e.g., exceeding 7.0). With a reinforcing film having a higher N60 / N23 , good secondary processing properties can be exhibited in the initial stage of application, and the adhesive force can be significantly increased by subsequent heating, etc. There is no particular upper limit to N 60 / N 23 , which is usually below 100. From the perspective of ease of manufacturing or economy of reinforcing membranes, it can be below 30, below 15, or below 10. In some cases, N 60 / N 23 can be below 5, below 3, or below 2.

再者,此處所揭示之補強用膜之加熱後黏著力表示該補強用膜之一特性,並非限定該補強用膜之使用態樣。換言之,此處所揭示之補強用膜之使用態樣並不限定於在60℃下進行60分鐘加熱之態樣,例如亦可於不特別進行加熱至室溫區域(通常為20℃~30℃,典型為23℃~25℃)以上之處理的態樣中使用。於該使用態樣中,黏著力亦長時間上升,可實現牢固之接合。又,此處所揭示之補強用膜可藉由在貼附後之任意時刻於超過30℃(例如50~70℃左右)或高於60℃之溫度下進行加熱處理而促進黏著力之上升。該加熱處理中之加熱溫度並無特別限定,可考慮作業性、經濟性、補強用膜之基材或被黏著體之耐熱性等來設定。上述加熱溫度例如可未達150℃,可為120℃以下,可為100℃以下,可為80℃以下,亦可為70℃以下。又,上述加熱溫度例如可設為40℃以上、45℃以上、50℃以上、55℃以上、60℃以上、或70℃以上,可設為80℃以上,亦可設為100℃以上。加熱時間並無特別限定,例如可為3小時以下,可為1小時以下,可為30分鐘以下,亦可為10分鐘以下。又,加熱時間例如可為1分鐘以上,可為15分鐘以上,可為30分鐘以上,亦可為1小時以上。或者,亦可於補強用膜或被黏著體不發生顯著之熱劣化之限度內進行更長時間之加熱處理。再者,加熱處理可一次性進行,亦可分成複數次進行。Furthermore, the adhesive strength of the reinforcing film disclosed herein after heating represents one characteristic of the reinforcing film and is not a limitation on its application. In other words, the application of the reinforcing film disclosed herein is not limited to a state of heating at 60°C for 60 minutes. For example, it can also be used in a state where it is not specifically heated to room temperature (typically 20°C to 30°C, and typically 23°C to 25°C). In this application state, the adhesive strength increases over a longer period, achieving a strong bond. Moreover, the adhesive strength of the reinforcing film disclosed herein can be increased by heating it at temperatures exceeding 30°C (e.g., around 50 to 70°C) or higher than 60°C at any time after application. The heating temperature in this heat treatment is not particularly limited and can be set considering factors such as workability, economy, and the heat resistance of the substrate of the reinforcing film or the adherend. For example, the heating temperature may be below 150°C, below 120°C, below 100°C, below 80°C, or below 70°C. Furthermore, the heating temperature may be set to above 40°C, 45°C, 50°C, 55°C, 60°C, or 70°C, above 80°C, or above 100°C. The heating time is not particularly limited; for example, it may be less than 3 hours, less than 1 hour, less than 30 minutes, or less than 10 minutes. Furthermore, the heating time may be more than 1 minute, more than 15 minutes, more than 30 minutes, or more than 1 hour. Alternatively, a longer heating treatment can be performed within the limit that no significant thermal degradation occurs in the reinforcing membrane or the adherend. Furthermore, the heating treatment can be performed in one go or in multiple stages.

<附基材之補強用膜> 於此處所揭示之補強用膜為附基材之黏著片材之形態之情形時,該補強用膜之厚度例如可為1000 μm以下,可為600 μm以下,可為350 μm以下,亦可為250 μm以下。就應用補強用膜之製品之小型化、輕量化、薄型化等觀點而言,於若干態樣中,補強用膜之厚度例如可為200 μm以下,可為175 μm以下,可為140 μm以下,可為120 μm以下,亦可為100 μm以下(例如未達100 μm)。又,就操作性等觀點而言,補強用膜之厚度例如可為5 μm以上,可為10 μm以上,可為15 μm以上,可為20 μm以上,可為25 μm以上,亦可為30 μm以上。於若干態樣中,補強用膜之厚度例如可為50 μm以上,可為60 μm以上,可為80 μm以上,可為100 μm以上,亦可為120 μm以上。補強用膜之厚度之上限並無特別限定。 再者,補強用膜之厚度係指貼附於被黏著體之部分之厚度。例如圖1所示之構成之補強用膜1中,係指補強用膜1之黏著面21A至基材10之第二面10B為止之厚度,不包括剝離襯墊31之厚度。 <Reinforcing Film for Substrate> When the reinforcing film disclosed herein is in the form of an adhesive sheet for a substrate, the thickness of the reinforcing film may be, for example, 1000 μm or less, 600 μm or less, 350 μm or less, or 250 μm or less. From the viewpoint of miniaturization, weight reduction, and thinning of products using the reinforcing film, in several embodiments, the thickness of the reinforcing film may be, for example, 200 μm or less, 175 μm or less, 140 μm or less, 120 μm or less, or 100 μm or less (e.g., less than 100 μm). Furthermore, from an operability perspective, the thickness of the reinforcing film can be, for example, 5 μm or more, 10 μm or more, 15 μm or more, 20 μm or more, 25 μm or more, or 30 μm or more. In some embodiments, the thickness of the reinforcing film can be, for example, 50 μm or more, 60 μm or more, 80 μm or more, 100 μm or more, or 120 μm or more. There is no particular upper limit to the thickness of the reinforcing film. Furthermore, the thickness of the reinforcing film refers to the thickness of the portion adhered to the substrate. For example, in the reinforcing film 1 configured as shown in Figure 1, it refers to the thickness from the adhesive surface 21A of the reinforcing film 1 to the second surface 10B of the substrate 10, excluding the thickness of the peel-off pad 31.

此處所揭示之補強用膜例如適宜以支持基材之厚度Ts大於黏著劑層之厚度Ta之態樣、即Ts/Ta大於1之態樣實施。Ts/Ta例如可為1.1以上,可為1.2以上,可為1.5以上,亦可為1.7以上,但並無特別限定。例如,藉由增大Ts/Ta,有即便使補強用膜薄型化亦容易發揮良好效果之傾向。於若干態樣中,Ts/Ta可為2以上(例如大於2),可為2.5以上,亦可為2.8以上。又,Ts/Ta例如可為50以下,亦可為20以下。就即便使補強用膜薄型化亦容易發揮較高之加熱後黏著力之觀點而言,Ts/Ta例如可為10以下,可為8以下,亦可為5以下。The reinforcing film disclosed herein is suitable for implementation in a configuration where the thickness Ts of the supporting substrate is greater than the thickness Ta of the adhesive layer, i.e., a Ts/Ta ratio greater than 1. Ts/Ta can be, for example, 1.1 or more, 1.2 or more, 1.5 or more, or 1.7 or more, but there is no particular limitation. For example, by increasing Ts/Ta, there is a tendency to achieve good results even when the reinforcing film is made thinner. In some configurations, Ts/Ta can be 2 or more (e.g., greater than 2), 2.5 or more, or 2.8 or more. Furthermore, Ts/Ta can be, for example, 50 or less, or 20 or less. From the viewpoint that higher post-heating adhesion is easily achieved even when the reinforcing film is made thinner, Ts/Ta can be, for example, 10 or less, 8 or less, or 5 or less.

上述黏著劑層較佳為固著於支持基材。此處所謂固著係指在貼附於被黏著體後黏著力上升之補強用膜中,黏著劑層對支持基材顯示出充分之抓固性,可使得該補強用膜自被黏著體剝離時黏著劑層與支持基材之界面不發生剝離。藉由黏著劑層固著於支持基材之附基材之補強用膜,可使被黏著體與支持基材牢固地一體化。作為黏著劑層固著於基材之補強用膜之一較佳例,可例舉:於測定上述加熱後黏著力時黏著劑層與支持基材之間不發生剝離(抓固破壞)之補強用膜。測定加熱後黏著力時不發生抓固破壞之補強用膜係屬於黏著劑層固著於基材之補強用膜的一較佳例。Preferably, the adhesive layer is adhered to the supporting substrate. Here, "adhesion" refers to the adhesive layer exhibiting sufficient grip on the supporting substrate in a reinforcing film where the adhesive force increases after attachment to the adherend, ensuring that the interface between the adhesive layer and the supporting substrate does not separate when the reinforcing film is peeled off from the adherend. By using a reinforcing film with an adhesive layer adhered to the supporting substrate, the adherend and the supporting substrate can be firmly integrated. A preferred example of a reinforcing film with an adhesive layer adhered to the substrate is a reinforcing film in which the adhesive layer does not peel off (break down) from the supporting substrate when the adhesive force after heating is measured. A reinforcing film that does not break down when the adhesion is tested after heating is a better example of a reinforcing film in which the adhesive layer is fixed to the substrate.

此處所揭示之補強用膜例如可藉由依序包括如下步驟之方法而良好地製造:使液狀之黏著劑組合物與基材之第一面接觸;及於該第一面上使上述黏著劑組合物硬化而形成黏著劑層。上述黏著劑組合物之硬化可伴有該黏著劑組合物之乾燥、交聯、聚合、冷卻等之一種或兩種以上。根據如此使液狀之黏著劑組合物於基材之第一面上硬化而形成黏著劑層之方法,與藉由將硬化後之黏著劑層貼合於基材之第一面而於該第一面上配置黏著劑層之方法相比,可提高黏著劑層對基材之抓固性。利用該情況,可適宜地製造黏著劑層固著於基材之補強用膜。The reinforcing film disclosed herein can be well manufactured, for example, by a method comprising the following steps in sequence: contacting a liquid adhesive composition with a first surface of a substrate; and hardening the adhesive composition on the first surface to form an adhesive layer. The hardening of the adhesive composition may be accompanied by one or more of the following: drying, crosslinking, polymerization, cooling, etc. Compared to a method of depositing an adhesive layer on the first surface of a substrate by bonding a hardened adhesive layer to the first surface of the substrate, the method of hardening the liquid adhesive composition on the first surface of the substrate to form an adhesive layer improves the adhesion of the adhesive layer to the substrate. This situation allows for the suitable manufacture of reinforcing films in which the adhesive layer is fixed to the substrate.

於若干態樣中,作為使液狀之黏著劑組合物與基材之第一面接觸之方法,可採用將上述黏著劑組合物直接塗佈於基材之第一面之方法。藉由使於基材之第一面上硬化之黏著劑層之第一面(黏著面)抵接於剝離面,可獲得該黏著劑層之第二面固著於基材之第一面且該黏著劑層之第一面抵接於剝離面之構成的補強用膜。作為上述剝離面,可利用剝離襯墊之表面或經剝離處理之基材背面等。In several embodiments, as a method for contacting the liquid adhesive composition with the first surface of the substrate, a method of directly applying the adhesive composition to the first surface of the substrate can be adopted. By having the first surface (adhesive surface) of the adhesive layer hardened on the first surface of the substrate abut against the peeling surface, a reinforcing film can be obtained in which the second surface of the adhesive layer is fixed to the first surface of the substrate and the first surface of the adhesive layer abuts against the peeling surface. The peeling surface can be the surface of a peeling pad or the back surface of the substrate after peeling treatment.

又,例如於使用單體原料之部分聚合物(聚合物漿液)的光硬化型黏著劑組合物之情形時,例如亦可於將該黏著劑組合物塗佈於剝離面後,於該塗佈之黏著劑組合物被覆基材之第一面,藉此使基材之第一面與未硬化之上述黏著劑組合物接觸,於該狀態下,對夾於基材之第一面與剝離面之間的黏著劑組合物進行光照射而使其硬化,藉此形成黏著劑層。Furthermore, in the case of photocurable adhesive compositions using a portion of a polymer (polymer slurry) of monomeric raw materials, for example, after the adhesive composition is applied to a peeling surface, the first surface of the substrate covered by the applied adhesive composition is brought into contact with the uncured adhesive composition. In this state, the adhesive composition sandwiched between the first surface of the substrate and the peeling surface is irradiated with light to cure it, thereby forming an adhesive layer.

再者,上述所例示之方法並非限定此處所揭示之補強用膜之製造方法。於此處所揭示之補強用膜之製造時,可將能夠使黏著劑層固著於基材之第一面之適當方法單獨使用一種或組合兩種以上而使用。此種方法之例可例舉:如上所述使液狀黏著劑組合物於基材之第一面上硬化而形成黏著劑層之方法、或對基材之第一面實施提高黏著劑層之抓固性之表面處理之方法等。例如於可藉由在基材之第一面設置底塗層等方法而使黏著劑層對基材之抓固性充分提高之情形時,亦可藉由將硬化後之黏著劑層貼合於基材之第一面之方法而製造補強用膜。又,藉由選擇基材之材質或選擇黏著劑之組成,亦可提高黏著劑層對基材之抓固性。又,藉由對在基材之第一面上具有黏著劑層之補強用膜應用高於室溫之溫度,可提高該黏著劑層對基材之抓固性。用於提高抓固性之溫度例如可為35℃~80℃左右,可為40℃~70℃以上程度,亦可為45℃~60℃左右。Furthermore, the methods described above are not limited to the manufacturing method of the reinforcing film disclosed herein. In manufacturing the reinforcing film disclosed herein, one or more suitable methods for adhering the adhesive layer to the first surface of the substrate can be used alone. Examples of such methods include: a method described above for hardening a liquid adhesive composition on the first surface of the substrate to form an adhesive layer, or a method for performing a surface treatment on the first surface of the substrate to improve the adhesion of the adhesive layer. For example, when the adhesion of the adhesive layer to the substrate can be sufficiently improved by providing a primer layer on the first surface of the substrate, the reinforcing film can also be manufactured by bonding the hardened adhesive layer to the first surface of the substrate. Furthermore, the adhesion of the adhesive layer to the substrate can be improved by selecting the material of the substrate or the composition of the adhesive. Also, the adhesion of the adhesive layer to the substrate can be improved by applying a temperature higher than room temperature to the reinforcing film having an adhesive layer on the first surface of the substrate. Temperatures used to improve adhesion can be, for example, around 35°C to 80°C, above 40°C to 70°C, or around 45°C to 60°C.

於此處所揭示之補強用膜為具有設置於基材之第一面之第一黏著劑層與設置於該基材之第二面之第二黏著劑層的黏著片材(即,雙面接著性之附基材之黏著片材)之形態之情形時,第一黏著劑層與第二黏著劑層可為相同之構成,亦可為不同之構成。於第一黏著劑層與第二黏著劑層之構成不同之情形時,該不同例如可為組成不同或結構(厚度、表面粗糙度、形成範圍、形成圖案等)不同。例如,第二黏著劑層可為不含聚合物(B)之黏著劑層。又,第二黏著劑層之表面(第二黏著面)於23℃下之表面彈性模數可為1~20 kPa之範圍外(例如超過20 kPa),亦可為30 kPa以上。When the reinforcing film disclosed herein is an adhesive sheet having a first adhesive layer disposed on a first side of a substrate and a second adhesive layer disposed on a second side of the substrate (i.e., an adhesive sheet with double-sided adhesion to the substrate), the first adhesive layer and the second adhesive layer may have the same or different compositions. When the first adhesive layer and the second adhesive layer have different compositions, the difference may be, for example, a difference in composition or a difference in structure (thickness, surface roughness, formation area, formation pattern, etc.). For example, the second adhesive layer may be an adhesive layer that does not contain polymer (B). Furthermore, the surface elastic modulus of the second adhesive layer (second adhesive surface) at 23°C can be in the range of 1 to 20 kPa (e.g., more than 20 kPa) or more than 30 kPa.

<附剝離襯墊之補強用膜> 此處所揭示之補強用膜可採用使黏著劑層之表面(黏著面)抵接於剝離襯墊之剝離面的黏著製品之形態。因此,藉由本說明書,可提供一種包含此處揭示之任一補強用膜、及具有抵接於該補強用膜之黏著面之剝離面之剝離襯墊的附剝離襯墊之補強用膜。 <Reinforcing Film for Attached Peel-Off Liner> The reinforcing film disclosed herein can be in the form of an adhesive article in which the surface (adhesive surface) of the adhesive layer abuts against the peel-off surface of the peel-off liner. Therefore, this specification provides a reinforcing film comprising any of the reinforcing films disclosed herein, and a peel-off liner having a peel-off surface abutting against the adhesive surface of the reinforcing film.

剝離襯墊之厚度並無特別限定,通常適宜為5 μm~200 μm左右。若剝離襯墊之厚度處於上述範圍內,則對黏著劑層之貼合作業性與自黏著劑層之剝離作業性優異,因此較佳。於若干態樣中,剝離襯墊之厚度例如可為10 μm以上,可為20 μm以上,可為30 μm以上,亦可為40 μm以上。又,就使自黏著劑層之剝離容易化之觀點而言,剝離襯墊之厚度例如可為100 μm以下,亦可為80 μm以下。視需要亦可對剝離襯墊實施塗佈型、混練型、蒸鍍型等公知之抗靜電處理。There is no particular limitation on the thickness of the peelable pad, but it is generally suitable to be around 5 μm to 200 μm. If the thickness of the peelable pad is within the above range, the adhesion and peelability of the adhesive layer are excellent, and therefore preferred. In some cases, the thickness of the peelable pad may be, for example, 10 μm or more, 20 μm or more, 30 μm or more, or 40 μm or more. Furthermore, from the viewpoint of facilitating the peeling of the self-adhesive layer, the thickness of the peelable pad may be, for example, 100 μm or less, or 80 μm or less. As needed, the peeling liner can also be treated with known antistatic treatments such as coating, mixing, or evaporation.

作為剝離襯墊,並無特別限定,例如可使用於樹脂膜或紙(可為層壓有聚乙烯等樹脂之紙)等襯墊基材之表面具有剝離層之剝離襯墊、或包含利用如氟系聚合物(聚四氟乙烯等)或聚烯烴系樹脂(聚乙烯、聚丙烯等)之低接著性材料所形成之樹脂膜的剝離襯墊等。就表面平滑性優異之方面而言,可良好地採用於作為襯墊基材之樹脂膜之表面具有剝離層之剝離襯墊、或包含利用低接著性材料所形成之樹脂膜之剝離襯墊。作為樹脂膜,只要為可保護黏著劑層之膜,則並無特別限定,例如可例舉:聚乙烯膜、聚丙烯膜、聚丁烯膜、聚丁二烯膜、聚甲基戊烯膜、聚氯乙烯膜、氯乙烯共聚物膜、聚酯膜(PET膜、PBT膜等)、聚胺基甲酸酯膜、乙烯-乙酸乙烯酯共聚物膜等。上述剝離層之形成例如可使用聚矽氧系剝離處理劑、長鏈烷基系剝離處理劑、烯烴系剝離處理劑、氟系剝離處理劑、脂肪酸醯胺系剝離處理劑、硫化鉬、二氧化矽粉等公知之剝離處理劑。尤佳為使用聚矽氧系剝離處理劑。There are no particular limitations on the type of release liner. For example, it can be used as a release liner on the surface of a resin film or paper (which may be paper laminated with resins such as polyethylene), or as a release liner containing a resin film formed using a low-adhesion material such as a fluoropolymer (polytetrafluoroethylene) or polyolefin resin (polyethylene, polypropylene, etc.). In terms of excellent surface smoothness, it is well-suited for use as a release liner on the surface of a resin film serving as a liner substrate, or as a release liner containing a resin film formed using a low-adhesion material. As for the resin film, there are no particular limitations as long as it is a film that can protect the adhesive layer. Examples include: polyethylene film, polypropylene film, polybutene film, polybutadiene film, polymethylpentene film, polyvinyl chloride film, vinyl chloride copolymer film, polyester film (PET film, PBT film, etc.), polyurethane film, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer film, etc. The above-mentioned release layer can be formed using, for example, polysiloxane-based release agents, long-chain alkyl-based release agents, olefin-based release agents, fluorinated release agents, fatty acid amide-based release agents, molybdenum sulfide, silica powder, and other known release agents. It is especially advantageous to use polysiloxane-based peeling agents.

剝離層之厚度並無特別限制,通常適宜為0.01 μm~1 μm左右,較佳為0.1 μm~1 μm左右。剝離層之形成方法並無特別限定,可適當採用與所使用之剝離處理劑之種類等對應之公知方法。There are no particular limitations on the thickness of the exfoliation layer, which is usually suitable at around 0.01 μm to 1 μm, and preferably around 0.1 μm to 1 μm. There are no particular limitations on the method of forming the exfoliation layer, and known methods corresponding to the type of exfoliating agent used can be appropriately adopted.

<用途> 本說明書所提供之補強用膜例如可在貼合於被黏著體之初期發揮良好之二次加工性,因此可有助於抑制良率降低或包含該補強用膜之製品之高品質化。而且,上述補強用膜在貼附於被黏著體後,可藉由熟化或加熱而使黏著力大幅地上升。例如藉由在貼附於被黏著體後之適當時刻進行加熱,可使補強用膜牢固地接著於被黏著體。利用此種特徵,此處所揭示之補強用膜可於各種領域良好地用以補強各種製品所含之構件。 <Applications> The reinforcing film provided in this specification exhibits excellent secondary processing properties during the initial application to the substrate, thus helping to prevent yield reduction and improve the quality of products containing the reinforcing film. Furthermore, the adhesive strength of the reinforcing film can be significantly increased by curing or heating after application to the substrate. For example, by heating at an appropriate time after application, the reinforcing film can be firmly bonded to the substrate. Utilizing these features, the reinforcing film disclosed herein can be effectively used in various fields to reinforce components in various products.

此處所揭示之補強用膜例如可以於具有第一面及第二面之膜狀基材之至少第一面設置有黏著劑層的附基材之黏著片材之形態,良好地用作貼附於被黏著體而對該被黏著體進行補強之補強膜。於該補強膜中,作為上述膜基材,可良好地使用包含樹脂膜作為基底膜者。又,就提高補強性能之觀點而言,上述黏著劑層較佳為固著於膜狀基材之第一面。 例如關於用於光學製品之光學構件、或用於電子製品之電子構件,高度之積體化、小型輕量化、薄型化不斷發展,可積層線膨脹係數或厚度不同之複數個較薄之光學構件/電子構件。藉由在此種構件貼附如上所述之補強膜,可對上述光學構件/電子構件賦予適度之剛性。藉此,於製造過程及/或製造後之製品中,可抑制因於上述線膨脹係數或厚度不同之複數個構件間可能產生之應力所導致之捲曲或彎曲。 又,於光學製品/電子製品之製造過程中,於如上所述對較薄之光學構件/電子構件進行切斷加工等形狀加工處理之情形時,藉由對該構件貼附補強膜而進行處理,可緩和伴隨加工之向光學構件/電子構件之局部之應力集中,可減少龜裂、破裂、積層構件之剝離等風險。對光學構件/電子構件貼附補強構件而進行操作亦可有助於緩和該構件進行搬送、積層、旋轉等時之局部應力集中、或抑制該構件之自重所導致之彎折或彎曲等。 進而,包含上述補強膜之光學製品或電子製品等裝置於在市場上供消費者使用之階段,即便於該裝置掉落之情形、置於重量物之下之情形、飛來物碰撞之情形等被施加意外應力之情形時,亦可藉由使該裝置包含補強膜而緩和施加於裝置之應力。因此,藉由使上述裝置包含補強膜,可提高該裝置之耐久性。 The reinforcing film disclosed herein can be, for example, an adhesive sheet having an adhesive layer disposed on at least the first side of a film-like substrate having a first side and a second side. It is well-suited as a reinforcing film for attaching to and reinforcing an adherend. In this reinforcing film, a resin film as the base film is well-suited as the film substrate. Furthermore, from the viewpoint of improving reinforcing performance, the adhesive layer is preferably adhered to the first side of the film-like substrate. For example, regarding optical components used in optical products, or electronic components used in electronic products, there is a continuous trend towards high integration, miniaturization, lightweighting, and thinning. Multiple thinner optical/electronic components with different coefficients of linear expansion or thicknesses can be laminated. By attaching the reinforcing film as described above to such components, appropriate rigidity can be imparted to the aforementioned optical/electronic components. This suppresses curling or bending caused by stresses that may arise between multiple components with different coefficients of linear expansion or thicknesses during the manufacturing process and/or in the finished product. Furthermore, during the manufacturing process of optical/electronic products, when performing shape processing such as cutting on thinner optical/electronic components as described above, attaching the reinforcing film to the component can mitigate the localized stress concentration in the optical/electronic component during processing, reducing the risk of cracking, breakage, and peeling of laminated components. Applying reinforcing components to optical/electronic components during operation can help alleviate localized stress concentrations during handling, lamination, and rotation, or suppress bending or flexing caused by the component's own weight. Furthermore, when optical or electronic products containing the aforementioned reinforcing film are marketed to consumers, even in cases of accidental stress such as drops, placement under heavy objects, or impacts from flying objects, the reinforcing film can mitigate the stress applied to the device. Therefore, by incorporating a reinforcing film into such devices, the durability of the devices can be improved.

又,此處所揭示之補強用膜例如可以貼附於構成各種攜帶型機器(可攜式機器)之構件之態樣良好地使用。此處所謂「攜帶」,並不單指能夠攜帶,而是指具有個人(標準成人)能夠相對容易地搬運之程度之攜帶性。又,此處所謂攜帶型機器之例可包括:行動電話、智慧型手機、平板型個人電腦、筆記型個人電腦、各種隨身機器、數位相機、數位攝錄影機、音響機器(攜帶音樂播放器、錄音筆等)、計算機(計算器等)、攜帶型遊戲機、電子辭典、電子記事本、電子書籍、車載用資訊機器、攜帶型收音機、攜帶型電視、攜帶型印表機、攜帶型掃描儀、攜帶型調制解調器等攜帶型電子機器,此外,亦可包括機械式手錶或懷錶、手電筒、放大鏡等。構成上述攜帶電子機器之構件之例可包括用於液晶顯示器等薄層顯示器或膜型顯示器等之類之圖像顯示裝置的光學膜或顯示面板等。此處所揭示之補強用膜亦可以貼附於汽車、家電製品等中之各種構件之態樣良好地使用。Furthermore, the reinforcing film disclosed herein can be applied to components constituting various portable machines in a manner that works well. The term "portable" here does not simply mean the ability to carry, but rather the degree of portability that allows a person (standard adult) to move it relatively easily. Furthermore, examples of portable devices here may include: mobile phones, smartphones, tablet computers, laptop computers, various portable devices, digital cameras, digital video cameras, audio devices (portable music players, voice recorders, etc.), computers (calculators, etc.), portable game consoles, electronic dictionaries, electronic notebooks, electronic books, in-vehicle information devices, portable radios, portable televisions, portable printers, portable scanners, portable modems, and other portable electronic devices. In addition, it may also include mechanical watches or pocket watches, flashlights, magnifying glasses, etc. Examples of components constituting the aforementioned portable electronic devices may include optical films or display panels used in image display devices such as liquid crystal displays or thin-film displays. The reinforcing films disclosed herein can also be applied to various components in automobiles, home appliances, etc., and are used effectively.

又,此處所揭示之補強用膜由於具有彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力,故可利用其優勢,良好地用於貼附於構成具備能夠彎曲之要素(例如可撓性顯示器等可撓性裝置;亦可稱為可捲曲裝置或可摺疊裝置)之機器之構件的態樣。作為此種機器,例如可例舉上述各種攜帶型機器(可攜式機器)。構成上述攜帶型電子機器之構件之例可包括:用於液晶顯示器或有機EL(電致發光)顯示器等圖像顯示裝置之光學膜或顯示面板等。此處所揭示之補強用膜可於此種攜帶型電子機器中良好地用於構成該機器之構件(典型的是稱為可撓性裝置或可摺疊裝置之圖像顯示裝置等)之補強用途。Furthermore, the reinforcing film disclosed herein, due to its flexibility and bending retention, can be effectively used to adhere to components of machines that constitute flexible elements (such as flexible devices like flexible displays; also referred to as rollable or foldable devices). Examples of such machines include the various portable machines described above. Examples of components constituting the aforementioned portable electronic machines include: optical films or display panels used in image display devices such as liquid crystal displays or organic EL (electroluminescent) displays. The reinforcing film disclosed herein can be well used in portable electronic devices for reinforcing components that make up the device (typically image display devices called flexible or foldable devices).

又,此處所揭示之補強用膜例如適於在作為液晶顯示器面板、電漿顯示器面板(PDP)、有機EL顯示器等之構成要素使用之光學構件之製造時、搬送時等對該光學構件進行補強之用途。作為應用於液晶顯示器面板用偏光板(偏光膜)、波長板、相位差板、光學補償膜、增亮膜、光擴散片材、反射片材等光學構件的補強用膜較為有用。Furthermore, the reinforcing film disclosed herein is suitable for reinforcing optical components used as components of liquid crystal display panels, plasma display panels (PDP), organic EL displays, etc., during manufacturing and transportation. It is particularly useful as a reinforcing film for optical components such as polarizing plates (polarizing films), wavelength plates, retardation plates, optical compensation films, brightness enhancement films, light diffusing sheets, and reflective sheets used in liquid crystal display panels.

再者,此處所揭示之補強用膜之用途並無特別限定,可用於以賦予剛性或耐衝擊性等為目的之各種用途。此處所揭示之補強用膜不僅如上所述可良好地用於可撓性裝置用途,還可用於不包括可撓性裝置之其他用途。補強用膜具有彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力意指該補強用膜之適用範圍之限制較少,實際應用中優勢較大。 [實施例] Furthermore, the applications of the reinforcing membrane disclosed herein are not particularly limited, and it can be used for various purposes, such as imparting rigidity or impact resistance. The reinforcing membrane disclosed herein is not only well-suited for flexible devices as described above, but also for other applications not involving flexible devices. The flexural resilience and flexural holding force of the reinforcing membrane indicate fewer limitations on its applicability and greater advantages in practical applications. [Example]

以下,對關於本發明之若干實施例進行說明,但並非意圖將本發明限定於該具體例所示者。再者,以下說明中之「份」及「%」若無特別說明,則為重量基準。The following describes several embodiments of the present invention, but it is not intended to limit the present invention to the specific examples shown. Furthermore, unless otherwise specified, "parts" and "%" in the following description are by weight.

[聚合物(A)之合成] (合成例A1) 於具備攪拌翼、溫度計、氮氣導入管及冷凝器之四口燒瓶中,加入丙烯酸2-乙基己酯(2EHA)90.2份、丙烯酸4-羥基丁酯(4HBA)8.6份、N-丙烯醯基𠰌啉(ACMO)1.2份、作為聚合起始劑之2,2'-偶氮二異丁腈(AIBN)0.2份、及作為聚合溶劑之乙酸乙酯,一面緩慢攪拌一面導入氮氣,將燒瓶內之液溫保持為65℃左右進行6小時聚合反應,製備聚合物濃度為35%之丙烯酸系聚合物A1溶液。丙烯酸系聚合物A1之重量平均分子量(Mw)為54萬。 [Synthesis of Polymer (A)] (Synthesis Example A1) In a four-necked flask equipped with a stirrer, thermometer, nitrogen inlet tube, and condenser, 90.2 parts of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA), 8.6 parts of 4-hydroxybutyl acrylate (4HBA), 1.2 parts of N-acryloyl terephthaloline (ACMO), 0.2 parts of 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN) as a polymerization initiator, and ethyl acetate as a polymerization solvent were added. Nitrogen gas was introduced while stirring slowly, and the liquid temperature in the flask was maintained at approximately 65°C for 6 hours to prepare an acrylic polymer A1 solution with a polymer concentration of 35%. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of acrylic polymer A1 is 540,000.

(合成例A2) 除了將單體組成變更為2EHA/4HBA/ACMO/丙烯酸丁酯(BA)=86.1份/9.7份/1.8份/2.4份以外,以與合成例A1相同之方式進行溶液聚合,藉此獲得丙烯酸系聚合物A2之溶液。 (Synthesis Example A2) Except for changing the monomer composition to 2EHA/4HBA/ACMO/butyl acrylate (BA) = 86.1 parts/9.7 parts/1.8 parts/2.4 parts, solution polymerization was carried out in the same manner as in Synthesis Example A1 to obtain a solution of acrylic polymer A2.

(合成例A3) 除了將單體組成變更為BA/4HBA=96份/4份以外,以與合成例A1相同之方式進行溶液聚合,藉此獲得丙烯酸系聚合物A3之溶液。 (Synthesis Example A3) Except for changing the monomer composition to BA/4HBA = 96 parts/4 parts, solution polymerization was carried out in the same manner as in Synthesis Example A1 to obtain a solution of acrylic polymer A3.

(合成例A4) 除了將單體組成變更為2EHA/丙烯酸2-羥基乙酯(HEA)/甲基丙烯酸甲酯(MMA)/N-乙烯基-2-吡咯啶酮(NVP)=65份/15份/7份/13份以外,以與合成例A1相同之方式進行溶液聚合,藉此獲得丙烯酸系聚合物A4之溶液。 (Synthesis Example A4) Except for changing the monomer composition to 65 parts/15 parts/7 parts/13 parts of 2EHA/2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (HEA)/methyl methacrylate (MMA)/N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone (NVP)/, solution polymerization was carried out in the same manner as in Synthesis Example A1 to obtain a solution of acrylic polymer A4.

[聚合物(B)之合成] 將乙酸乙酯101.15份、MMA 40份、甲基丙烯酸正丁酯(BMA)20份、甲基丙烯酸2-乙基己酯(2EHMA)20份、官能基當量為900 g/mol之含聚有機矽氧烷骨架之甲基丙烯酸酯單體(商品名:X-22-174ASX,信越化學工業公司製造)8.7份、官能基當量為4600 g/mol之含聚有機矽氧烷骨架之甲基丙烯酸酯單體(商品名:KF-2012,信越化學工業公司製造)11.3份、及作為鏈轉移劑之硫甘油0.8份投入至具備攪拌翼、溫度計、氮氣導入管、冷凝器及滴液漏斗之四口燒瓶中。然後,於70℃下,在氮氣氛圍下攪拌30分鐘後,投入作為熱聚合起始劑之AIBN 0.2份,於70℃下進行3小時反應。繼而,於80℃下攪拌30分鐘後,進而投入AIBN 0.1份,於80℃下進行2小時反應。其後,進而投入AIBN 0.05份,於80℃下進行2小時反應,獲得聚合物B。所獲得之聚合物B之Mw為20000。 [Synthesis of Polymer (B)] 101.15 parts of ethyl acetate, 40 parts of MMA, 20 parts of n-butyl methacrylate (BMA), 20 parts of 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate (2EHMA), 8.7 parts of a methacrylate monomer with a functional group equivalent of 900 g/mol containing a polyorganosiloxane backbone (trade name: X-22-174ASX, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), 11.3 parts of a methacrylate monomer with a functional group equivalent of 4600 g/mol containing a polyorganosiloxane backbone (trade name: KF-2012, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), and 0.8 parts of thioglycerol as a chain transfer agent were added to a four-necked flask equipped with a stirring blade, thermometer, nitrogen inlet tube, condenser and dropping funnel. Then, after stirring at 70°C under a nitrogen atmosphere for 30 minutes, 0.2 parts of AIBN as a thermal polymerization initiator were added, and the reaction was carried out at 70°C for 3 hours. Next, after stirring at 80°C for 30 minutes, 0.1 parts of AIBN were added, and the reaction was carried out at 80°C for 2 hours. Subsequently, 0.05 parts of AIBN were added, and the reaction was carried out at 80°C for 2 hours to obtain polymer B. The Mw of the obtained polymer B is 20000.

再者,上述各聚合物之Mw係使用GPC裝置(Tosoh公司製造,HLC-8220GPC)於下述條件下進行測定,藉由聚苯乙烯換算而求出。 [GPC條件] ・樣品濃度:0.2 wt%(四氫呋喃(THF)溶液) ・樣品注入量:10 μl ・溶析液:THF、流速:0.6 ml/min ・測定溫度:40℃ ・管柱: 樣品管柱:TSKguardcolumn SuperHZ-H(1根)+TSKgel SuperHZM-H(2根) 參考管柱:TSKgel SuperH-RC(1根) ・檢測器:示差折射計(RI) Furthermore, the molecular weight (Mw) of each polymer was determined using a GPC apparatus (Tosoh, HLC-8220GPC) under the following conditions, and calculated using polystyrene conversion. [GPC Conditions] ・Sample concentration: 0.2 wt% (tetrahydrofuran (THF) solution) ・Sample injection volume: 10 μl ・Cutting solution: THF, flow rate: 0.6 ml/min ・Measurement temperature: 40℃ ・Columns: Sample column: TSKguardcolumn SuperHZ-H (1 column) + TSKgel SuperHZM-H (2 columns) Reference column: TSKgel SuperH-RC (1 column) ・Detector: Differential refractometer (RI)

[補強用膜之製作] <實施例1> 添加100份丙烯酸系聚合物A1、2.0份聚合物B、以固形物成分換算計0.015份作為交聯劑之異氰酸酯化合物C1(商品名「Coronate HX」,Tosoh公司製造),利用乙酸乙酯稀釋至整體之固形物成分成為30%,獲得本例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。 準備單面實施了聚矽氧處理之厚度75 μm之包含聚酯樹脂之剝離襯墊(商品名「DIAFOIL MRF75」,三菱化學公司製造),於其聚矽氧處理面塗佈上述所獲得之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液,於130℃、1分鐘之條件下進行乾燥,藉此形成厚度25 μm之黏著劑層。 繼而,於所獲得之黏著劑層之表面貼合厚度50 μm之聚醯亞胺基材(商品名「Upilex 50S」,宇部興產公司製造)而獲得本例之補強用膜。該補強用膜具有附剝離襯墊之黏著片材之形態,即,於基材單面具有黏著劑層,於其黏著面抵接有剝離襯墊之剝離面。 再者,針對本例之補強用膜,根據黏著劑層中之OH量(丙烯酸系聚合物A1中之羥基之莫耳數)與NCO量(異氰酸酯化合物之異氰酸基之莫耳數),算出莫耳比([NCO]/[OH]),結果為0.001。 [Preparation of Reinforcing Film] <Example 1> 100 parts of acrylic polymer A1, 2.0 parts of polymer B, and 0.015 parts of isocyanate compound C1 (trade name "Coronate HX", manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) as a crosslinking agent (based on solids content) were added. The mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate to a total solids content of 30% to obtain the acrylic adhesive solution of this example. A 75 μm thick release liner containing polyester resin (trade name "DIAFOIL MRF75", manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Co., Ltd.) with one side treated with polysiloxane was prepared. An acrylic adhesive solution obtained above was applied to the polysiloxane-treated surface and dried at 130°C for 1 minute to form an adhesive layer with a thickness of 25 μm. Subsequently, a 50 μm thick polyimide substrate (trade name "Upilex 50S", manufactured by Ube Industries, Ltd.) was laminated onto the surface of the adhesive layer to obtain the reinforcing film of this example. The reinforcing film has the form of an adhesive sheet with a release liner, that is, an adhesive layer is present on one side of the substrate, and the release liner is attached to the adhesive side. Furthermore, for the reinforcing film in this example, the molar ratio ([NCO]/[OH]) was calculated based on the amount of OH (the molar number of hydroxyl groups in the acrylic polymer A1) and the amount of NCO (the molar number of isocyanate groups in the isocyanate compound) in the adhesive layer, and the result is 0.001.

<實施例2~5> 將異氰酸酯化合物C1之使用量如表1所示變更為相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A1 100份,以固形物成分換算計為0.05份(實施例2)、0.10份(實施例3)、0.20份(實施例4)、0.60份(實施例5),除此以外,以與實施例1相同之方式獲得各例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除分別使用該等丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作各例之補強用膜。 <Examples 2-5> The amount of isocyanate compound C1 used was changed to 0.05 parts (Example 2), 0.10 parts (Example 3), 0.20 parts (Example 4), and 0.60 parts (Example 5) relative to 100 parts of acrylic polymer A1, as calculated by solid content. Otherwise, the acrylic adhesive solutions of each example were obtained in the same manner as in Example 1. Except for the use of these acrylic adhesive solutions, the reinforcing films of each example were manufactured in the same manner as the reinforcing film of Example 1.

<實施例6~9> 將聚合物B之使用量如表1所示變更為相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A1 100份為0.4份(實施例6)、1.0份(實施例7)、3.0份(實施例8)、6.0份(實施例9),除此以外,以與實施例3相同之方式獲得各例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除分別使用該等丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作各例之補強用膜。 <Examples 6-9> The amount of polymer B used was varied as shown in Table 1 to be 0.4 parts (Example 6), 1.0 parts (Example 7), 3.0 parts (Example 8), and 6.0 parts (Example 9) relative to 100 parts of acrylic polymer A1. Otherwise, the acrylic adhesive solutions of each example were obtained in the same manner as in Example 3. Except for the use of these acrylic adhesive solutions, the reinforcing films of each example were manufactured in the same manner as the reinforcing film of Example 1.

<實施例10> 除使用丙烯酸系聚合物A2代替丙烯酸系聚合物A1以外,以與實施例3相同之方式獲得本例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除使用所獲得之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作本例之補強用膜。 <Example 10> The acrylic adhesive solution of this example is obtained in the same manner as in Example 3, except that acrylic polymer A2 is used instead of acrylic polymer A1. The reinforcing film of this example is manufactured in the same manner as the reinforcing film of Example 1, except that the obtained acrylic adhesive solution is used.

<實施例11> 使用丙烯酸系聚合物A3代替丙烯酸系聚合物A1,使用異氰酸酯化合物C2(商品名「Takenate D110N」,三井化學公司製造)作為交聯劑,該異氰酸酯化合物C2相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A3 100份以固形物成分換算計為0.07份,除此以外,以與實施例1相同之方式獲得本例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除使用所獲得之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作本例之補強用膜。 <Example 11> Acrylic polymer A3 is used instead of acrylic polymer A1, and isocyanate compound C2 (trade name "Takenate D110N", manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals Co., Ltd.) is used as the crosslinking agent. The isocyanate compound C2 accounts for 0.07 parts of 100 parts of acrylic polymer A3 based on solid content. Otherwise, the acrylic adhesive solution of this example is obtained in the same manner as in Example 1. Except for using the obtained acrylic adhesive solution, the reinforcing film of this example is manufactured in the same manner as the reinforcing film of Example 1.

<實施例12~13> 將異氰酸酯化合物C2之使用量如表1所示變更為相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A3 100份,以固形物成分換算計為0.09份(實施例12)、0.395份(實施例13),除此以外,以與實施例11相同之方式獲得各例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除分別使用該等丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作各例之補強用膜。 <Examples 12-13> The amount of isocyanate compound C2 used was changed as shown in Table 1 to 0.09 parts (Example 12) and 0.395 parts (Example 13) of solids relative to 100 parts of acrylic polymer A3. Otherwise, the acrylic adhesive solutions of each example were obtained in the same manner as in Example 11. Except for the use of these acrylic adhesive solutions, the reinforcing films of each example were manufactured in the same manner as the reinforcing film of Example 1.

<實施例14~18> 於實施例3之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液之製備中,除丙烯酸系聚合物A1、聚合物B、異氰酸酯化合物C1以外,如表1所示,進而添加相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A1 100份以固形物成分換算計為0.001份(實施例14)、0.005份(實施例15)、0.010份(實施例16)、0.020份(實施例17)、0.050份(實施例18)之鐵系觸媒(三乙醯丙酮鐵,日本化學產業公司製造),利用乙酸乙酯(溶劑成分之98%)、乙醯丙酮(溶劑成分之2%)稀釋至整體之固形物成分成為30%,獲得各例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除分別使用該等丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作各例之補強用膜。再者,表1中亦示出黏著劑層所含之觸媒與羥基之莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])。上述莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])係根據黏著劑層中之OH量(丙烯酸系聚合物A1中之羥基之莫耳數)與觸媒量(觸媒之莫耳數)而算出之值。 <Examples 14-18> In the preparation of the acrylic adhesive solution of Example 3, in addition to acrylic polymer A1, polymer B, and isocyanate compound C1, as shown in Table 1, an iron catalyst (ferric triacetone, manufactured by Nippon Kagaku Kogyo Co., Ltd.) was added in amounts equivalent to 100 parts of acrylic polymer A1, calculated as 0.001 parts (Example 14), 0.005 parts (Example 15), 0.010 parts (Example 16), 0.020 parts (Example 17), and 0.050 parts (Example 18) of solid content. The solution was diluted with ethyl acetate (98% of the solvent content) and acetone (2% of the solvent content) until the total solid content reached 30%, thus obtaining the acrylic adhesive solutions of each example. Except for using the acrylic adhesive solutions respectively, the reinforcing films of each example were prepared in the same manner as those of Example 1. Furthermore, Table 1 also shows the molar ratio ([catalyst]/[OH]) of the catalyst to hydroxyl groups contained in the adhesive layer. The above molar ratio ([catalyst]/[OH]) is a value calculated based on the amount of OH (the molar number of hydroxyl groups in the acrylic polymer A1) and the amount of catalyst (the molar number of the catalyst) in the adhesive layer.

<實施例19~20> 將聚合物B之使用量如表1所示變更為相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A1 100份為1.0份(實施例19)、3.0份(實施例20),除此以外,以與實施例14相同之方式獲得各例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除分別使用該等丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作各例之補強用膜。 <Examples 19-20> The amount of polymer B used was changed as shown in Table 1 to 1.0 part (Example 19) and 3.0 parts (Example 20) relative to 100 parts of acrylic polymer A1. Otherwise, the acrylic adhesive solutions of each example were obtained in the same manner as in Example 14. Except for the use of these acrylic adhesive solutions, the reinforcing films of each example were manufactured in the same manner as the reinforcing film of Example 1.

<比較例1> 添加100份丙烯酸系聚合物A1、以固形物成分換算計為0.05份之作為交聯劑之異氰酸酯化合物C1(商品名「Coronate HX」,Tosoh公司製造),利用乙酸乙酯稀釋至整體之固形物成分成為30%,獲得本例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除使用所獲得之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作本例之補強用膜。 <Comparative Example 1> 100 parts of acrylic polymer A1 and 0.05 parts of isocyanate compound C1 (trade name "Coronate HX", manufactured by Tosoh Co., Ltd.) as a crosslinking agent were added, and diluted with ethyl acetate to a total solids content of 30% to obtain the acrylic adhesive solution of this example. Except for using the obtained acrylic adhesive solution, the reinforcing film of this example was prepared in the same manner as the reinforcing film of Example 1.

<比較例2~3> 將異氰酸酯化合物C1之使用量如表1所示變更為相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A1 100份以固形物成分換算計為0.10份(比較例2)、0.20份(比較例3),除此以外,以與比較例1相同之方式獲得各例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除分別使用該等丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作各例之補強用膜。 <Comparative Examples 2-3> The amount of isocyanate compound C1 used was changed as shown in Table 1 to 0.10 parts (Comparative Example 2) and 0.20 parts (Comparative Example 3) relative to 100 parts of acrylic polymer A1, calculated based on solid content. Otherwise, the acrylic adhesive solutions of each example were obtained in the same manner as in Comparative Example 1. Except for using these acrylic adhesive solutions, the reinforcing films of each example were manufactured in the same manner as the reinforcing film of Example 1.

<比較例4> 使用丙烯酸系聚合物A4代替丙烯酸系聚合物A1,使用異氰酸酯化合物C2(商品名「Takenate D110N」,三井化學公司製造)作為交聯劑,該異氰酸酯化合物C2相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A4 100份以固形物成分換算計為0.50份,除此以外,以與比較例1相同之方式獲得本例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除使用所獲得之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作本例之補強用膜。 <Comparative Example 4> Acrylic polymer A4 was used instead of acrylic polymer A1, and isocyanate compound C2 (trade name "Takenate D110N", manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals Co., Ltd.) was used as the crosslinking agent. The isocyanate compound C2 was present in 0.50 parts per 100 parts of acrylic polymer A4, calculated based on solid content. Otherwise, the acrylic adhesive solution of this example was obtained in the same manner as in Comparative Example 1. Except for using the obtained acrylic adhesive solution, the reinforcing film of this example was manufactured in the same manner as the reinforcing film of Example 1.

<比較例5~6> 將異氰酸酯化合物C2之使用量如表1所示變更為相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A4 100份以固形物成分換算計為1.10份(比較例5)、2.50份(比較例6),除此以外,以與比較例4相同之方式獲得各例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除分別使用該等丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作各例之補強用膜。 <Comparative Examples 5-6> The amount of isocyanate compound C2 used was changed as shown in Table 1 to 1.10 parts (Comparative Example 5) and 2.50 parts (Comparative Example 6) relative to 100 parts of acrylic polymer A4, calculated based on solid content. Otherwise, the acrylic adhesive solutions for each example were obtained in the same manner as in Comparative Example 4. Except for using these acrylic adhesive solutions, the reinforcing films for each example were prepared in the same manner as the reinforcing film of Example 1.

<比較例7> 於丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液之製備中,除丙烯酸系聚合物A4、異氰酸酯化合物C2以外,如表1所示,添加相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A4 100份為2.0份之聚合物B,除此以外,以與比較例4相同之方式獲得本例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除使用所獲得之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作本例之補強用膜。 <Comparative Example 7> In the preparation of the acrylic adhesive solution, apart from acrylic polymer A4 and isocyanate compound C2, as shown in Table 1, polymer B was added in an amount of 2.0 parts per 100 parts of acrylic polymer A4. Otherwise, the acrylic adhesive solution of this example was obtained in the same manner as in Comparative Example 4. Except for using the obtained acrylic adhesive solution, the reinforcing film of this example was prepared in the same manner as the reinforcing film of Example 1.

<比較例8~9> 將異氰酸酯化合物C2之使用量如表1所示變更為相對於丙烯酸系聚合物A4 100份以固形物成分換算計為1.10份(比較例8)、2.50份(比較例9),除此以外,以與比較例7相同之方式獲得各例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液。除分別使用該等丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液以外,以與實施例1之補強用膜之製作相同之方式製作各例之補強用膜。 <Comparative Examples 8-9> The amount of isocyanate compound C2 used was changed as shown in Table 1 to 1.10 parts (Comparative Example 8) and 2.50 parts (Comparative Example 9) relative to 100 parts of acrylic polymer A4, calculated based on solid content. Otherwise, the acrylic adhesive solutions for each example were obtained in the same manner as in Comparative Example 7. Except for using these acrylic adhesive solutions, the reinforcing films for each example were prepared in the same manner as the reinforcing film of Example 1.

<評價> [表面彈性模數] 針對各例之補強用膜,於50℃下進行1天熟化,實施表面彈性模數測定。將保護黏著面之剝離襯墊剝離,使用奈米壓痕儀裝置(Hysitron Inc.製造之Triboindenter),對黏著劑層表面壓入壓頭至壓入深度6 μm,藉由利用上述奈米壓痕儀進行測定而獲得最大荷重(Pmax)[GPa/mm 2]。將其代入如下式中, 表面硬度[GPa]=Pmax/A 算出表面硬度,換算成[kPa]單位,記錄為23℃下之表面彈性模數(23℃表面彈性模數)。測定條件如下所述。再者,上式中,A為壓頭之接觸投影面積[mm 2]。 (測定條件) 壓頭接近速度:5 μm/s 最大位移:6 μm 壓入速度:5 μm/s 抽出速度:5 μm/s 使用壓頭:Conical(球形壓頭:曲率半徑10 μm) 測定方法:單一壓入測定 測定溫度:室溫(23℃) <Evaluation> [Surface Elastic Modulus] For each example of reinforcing film, the surface elastic modulus was measured after curing at 50°C for 1 day. The protective adhesive pad was removed, and an indenter was pressed into the adhesive layer surface to a depth of 6 μm using a nano-indenter (Triboindenter manufactured by Hysitron Inc.). The maximum load (Pmax) [GPa/ mm² ] was obtained by measuring using the nano-indenter. Substituting this into the following formula, surface hardness [GPa] = Pmax/A, the surface hardness was calculated, converted to [kPa] units, and recorded as the surface elastic modulus at 23°C (surface elastic modulus at 23°C). The measurement conditions are described below. Furthermore, in the above formula, A is the contact projection area of the indenter [ mm² ]. (Measurement conditions) Indenter approach speed: 5 μm/s Maximum displacement: 6 μm Indentation speed: 5 μm/s Withdrawal speed: 5 μm/s Indenter used: Conical (spherical indenter: radius of curvature 10 μm) Measurement method: Single indentation measurement Measurement temperature: Room temperature (23℃)

[體積彈性模數G'及tanδ] 準備單面實施了聚矽氧處理之厚度75 μm之包含聚酯樹脂之剝離襯墊R1(商品名「DIAFOIL MRF75」,三菱化學公司製造),於其聚矽氧處理面塗佈各例之丙烯酸系黏著劑溶液,於130℃、1分鐘之條件下進行乾燥,藉此形成厚度25 μm之黏著劑層。繼而,將單面實施了聚矽氧處理之厚度75 μm之包含聚酯樹脂之剝離襯墊R2(商品名「DIAFOIL MRE75」,三菱化學公司製造)以其聚矽氧處理面為黏著劑層側之方式被覆於所獲得之黏著劑層之表面,於50℃下進行1天熟化。 僅取出所獲得之黏著劑層,積層至約1 mm厚度,將其沖切成 8 mm,製作圓柱狀顆粒,作為測定用樣品。 將上述測定樣品固定於 8 mm平行板之治具,利用動態黏彈性測定裝置(TA Instruments公司製造之「ARES」),於以下條件下測定儲存彈性模數G'、損耗彈性模數G''及損耗正切tanδ,求出23℃下之儲存彈性模數G' 23[kPa]、80℃下之儲存彈性模數G' 80[kPa]及80℃下之tanδ(80℃下之損耗彈性模數G'' 80/80℃下之儲存彈性模數G' 80)。 ・測定模式:剪切模式 ・溫度範圍 :-70℃~200℃ ・升溫速度 :5℃/min ・頻率:1 Hz 再者,儲存彈性模數G'相當於材料變形時作為彈性能量儲存之部分,係表示硬度之程度之指標。損耗彈性模數G''相當於材料變形時因內部摩擦等而散逸之損失能量部分,表示黏性程度。 [Volume elastic modulus G' and tanδ] A 75 μm thick release liner containing polyester resin (trade name "DIAFOIL MRF75", manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Co., Ltd.) with polysiloxane treatment on one side was prepared. An acrylic adhesive solution of various types was applied to the polysiloxane-treated side and dried at 130°C for 1 minute to form an adhesive layer with a thickness of 25 μm. Next, a 75 μm thick release liner containing polyester resin, labeled "DIAFOIL MRE75" (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), with its polysiloxane-treated side facing the adhesive layer, was applied to the surface of the obtained adhesive layer and cured at 50°C for one day. Only the obtained adhesive layer was removed, laminated to a thickness of approximately 1 mm, and then die-cut. 8 mm diameter cylindrical particles were prepared as samples for testing. The above-mentioned test samples were fixed onto... A fixture with an 8 mm parallel plate was used to measure the storage elastic modulus G', loss elastic modulus G'', and loss tangent tanδ under the following conditions using a dynamic viscoelasticity measuring device (ARES manufactured by TA Instruments). The storage elastic modulus G'23 [kPa] at 23℃, the storage elastic modulus G'80 [kPa] at 80℃, and tanδ at 80℃ (loss elastic modulus G''80 at 80 ℃ / storage elastic modulus G'80 at 80 ℃) were calculated. • Measurement mode: Shear mode • Temperature range: -70℃~200℃ • Heating rate: 5℃/min • Frequency: 1 Hz Furthermore, the stored elastic modulus G' is equivalent to the portion of elastic energy stored during material deformation, and is an indicator of the degree of hardness. The dissipated elastic modulus G'' is equivalent to the portion of energy lost due to internal friction, etc., during material deformation, and indicates the degree of viscosity.

[初期黏著力] 針對各例之補強用膜,於50℃下進行1天熟化,連同剝離襯墊切割成寬度25 mm×長度140 mm,作為測定樣品。將剝離襯墊自上述測定樣品剝離,使黏著面露出,使2 kg手壓輥往返1次而將其壓接至作為被黏著體之不鏽鋼鋼板(SUS304BA板)。將如此壓接至被黏著體之測定樣品於23℃環境溫度下放置30分鐘後,使用拉伸試驗機(島津製作所公司製造,商品名「Autograph AG-Xplus HS 6000 mm/min高速模式(AG-50NX plus)」),於剝離角度180度、剝離速度(拉伸速度)300 mm/min之條件下,測定自上述被黏著體剝離補強用膜時之荷重,將測定時之平均荷重記錄為初期黏著力[gf/25 mm]。 [Initial Adhesion] The reinforcing films for each example were cured at 50°C for one day and then cut together with the release liner into 25 mm wide x 140 mm long samples as test specimens. The release liner was then peeled off from the test specimens, exposing the adhesive surface. A 2 kg hand roller was used to press the film back and forth once to adhere it to the stainless steel plate (SUS304BA plate) used as the bonded object. After placing the test sample, thus pressed to the substrate, at an ambient temperature of 23°C for 30 minutes, a tensile testing machine (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation, product name "Autograph AG-Xplus HS 6000 mm/min high-speed mode (AG-50NX plus)") was used to measure the load when the reinforcing film was peeled off from the substrate under the conditions of a peeling angle of 180 degrees and a peeling speed (tensile speed) of 300 mm/min. The average load at the time of measurement was recorded as the initial adhesive force [gf/25 mm].

[加熱後黏著力] 針對各例之補強用膜,以與上述初期黏著力測定相同之方式準備測定樣品,壓接至被黏著體。然後,將壓接至上述被黏著體之測定樣品於60℃環境溫度下加熱60分鐘。其後,於23℃環境溫度下放置30分鐘,使用拉伸試驗機(島津製作所公司製造,商品名「Autograph AG-Xplus HS 6000mm/min高速模式(AG-50NX plus)」),於剝離角度180度、剝離速度(拉伸速度)300 mm/min之條件下,測定自上述被黏著體剝離補強用膜時之荷重,將測定時之平均荷重記錄為加熱後黏著力[gf/25 mm]。 [Post-Heat Adhesion] For each example of the reinforcing film, test samples were prepared in the same manner as the initial adhesion test described above, and pressed onto the substrate. Then, the test samples pressed onto the substrate were heated at 60°C for 60 minutes. Afterwards, they were placed at 23°C for 30 minutes, and using a tensile testing machine (Shimadzu Corporation, trade name "Autograph AG-Xplus HS 6000mm/min high-speed mode (AG-50NX plus)"), under conditions of a peeling angle of 180 degrees and a peeling speed (tensile speed) of 300 mm/min, the load when peeling the reinforcing film from the substrate was measured. The average load measured was recorded as the post-heat adhesion [gf/25 mm].

[彎曲保持試驗] 針對各例之補強用膜,於50℃下進行1天熟化後,將剝離襯墊剝離,於露出之黏著面貼合厚度25 μm之聚醯亞胺基材(商品名「Upilex 25S」,宇部興產公司製造),於60℃下加熱60分鐘使其密接。繼而,將所獲得之測定樣品(積層體)以25 μm基材側為內側而彎折成 6 mm,於此狀態下固定,於80℃下進行15小時加熱。然後,放置於室溫(23℃),確認充分冷卻後,解除上述測定樣品之彎折狀態之固定,自固定解除起10分鐘以內,使用分度器,測定彎折之上述測定樣品之彎曲角度[°],評價彎曲回復性。再者,彎曲角度係測定樣品之打開角度(測定樣品自彎折狀態打開之側之角度),越接近於180°,則具有越優異之彎曲回復性,彎曲角度越接近於0°,則彎曲回復性越差。 繼而,作為彎曲保持力之評價,目視確認測定樣品之彎曲部有無「剝離」,將未確認到「剝離」之情形評價為「G(Good)」,將確認到「剝離」之情形評價為「P(Poor)」。 [Bending Retention Test] For each reinforcing film, after curing at 50°C for 1 day, the peel-off backing was removed, and a 25 μm thick polyimide substrate (trade name "Upilex 25S", manufactured by Ube Industries, Ltd.) was laminated onto the exposed adhesive surface. The substrate was then heated at 60°C for 60 minutes to ensure a tight bond. Subsequently, the obtained test sample (laminate) was bent with the 25 μm substrate side as the inside. The sample was fixed at 6 mm in this state and heated at 80°C for 15 hours. Then, it was placed at room temperature (23°C) and, after confirming sufficient cooling, the fixed bending state of the test sample was released. Within 10 minutes of releasing the fixation, the bending angle [°] of the bent test sample was measured using a scale to evaluate the bending recovery. Furthermore, the bending angle is the opening angle of the test sample (the angle of the test sample from the side opened from the bent state). The closer to 180°, the better the bending recovery; the closer the bending angle is to 0°, the worse the bending recovery. Next, as an evaluation of bending retention, the bending portion of the test sample was visually confirmed to see if there was any "peeling". If no "peeling" was confirmed, it was rated as "G (Good)" and if "peeling" was confirmed, it was rated as "P (Poor)".

[氣泡產生確認] 針對各例之補強用膜,於50℃下進行1天熟化後,切割成10 cm×10 cm尺寸,將剝離襯墊剝離,目視確認每10 cm見方之氣泡產生量,根據以下基準進行評價。 E(Excellent):未確認到氣泡產生。 G(Good):確認到氣泡產生,但氣泡產生面積為每10 cm見方為50%以下。 A(Acceptable):以每10 cm見方為50%以上之面積確認到氣泡產生。但為實際應用中無問題之等級。 [Bubble Generation Confirmation] For each reinforcing membrane, after curing at 50°C for one day, it was cut into 10 cm × 10 cm pieces. The peel-off liner was removed, and the amount of bubble generation per 10 cm square was visually confirmed. Evaluation was based on the following criteria: E (Excellent): No bubble generation confirmed. G (Good): Bubble generation confirmed, but the bubble generation area is less than 50% per 10 cm square. A (Acceptable): Bubble generation confirmed at an area of more than 50% per 10 cm square. This indicates no problems in actual application.

將對各例之補強用膜之評價結果示於表1。表1中亦一起示出各例之黏著劑層之組成之概略。The evaluation results of the reinforcing films for each example are shown in Table 1. Table 1 also shows a general overview of the composition of the adhesive layer for each example.

[表1] 表1    聚合物(A)[份] 聚合物(B) [份] 交聯劑[份] 莫耳比 [NCO]/[OH] 觸媒 [份] 觸媒莫耳比 [觸媒]/[OH] 表面彈性模數 23℃[kPa] 體積彈性模數 23℃[kPa] 體積彈性模數 80℃[kPa] tanδ 80℃ 初期黏著力 [gf/25 mm] 加熱後黏著力 [gf/25 mm] 彎曲回復性 [°] 彎曲保持力 氣泡產生 A1 A2 A3 A4 C1 C2 實施例1 100 - - - 2.0 0.015 - 0.001 - - 1.2 33 8 0.79 325 2144 35 G G 實施例2 100 - - - 2.0 0.05 - 0.004 - - 2.7 33 11 0.60 368 877 50 G G 實施例3 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 5.1 33 11 0.51 256 821 90 G G 實施例4 100 - - - 2.0 0.20 - 0.016 - - 6.9 33 14 0.41 209 607 90 G G 實施例5 100 - - - 2.0 0.60 - 0.049 - - 10.8 41 24 0.23 128 463 100 G A 實施例6 100 - - - 0.4 0.10 - 0.008 - - 3.2 32 11 0.52 502 923 120 G G 實施例7 100 - - - 1.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 4.8 32 12 0.52 221 750 115 G G 實施例8 100 - - - 3.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 5.6 38 13 0.51 283 651 65 G G 實施例9 100 - - - 6.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 6.8 39 14 0.51 185 495 60 G G 實施例10 - 100 - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 5.3 34 12 0.51 262 832 90 G G 實施例11 - - 100 - 2.0 - 0.07 0.028 - - 15.1 81 52 0.25 275 547 105 G G 實施例12 - - 100 - 2.0 - 0.09 0.036 - - 15.5 96 63 0.24 245 404 105 G A 實施例13 - - 100 - 2.0 - 0.395 0.160 - - 17.8 114 88 0.13 186 331 110 G A 實施例14 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.001 4.6E-05 5.1 33 12 0.51 105 602 90 G E 實施例15 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.005 2.3E-04 5.1 33 12 0.52 159 624 85 G E 實施例16 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.010 4.6E-04 5.0 33 11 0.51 160 641 90 G E 實施例17 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.020 9.2E-04 5.1 34 13 0.51 134 644 90 G E 實施例18 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.050 2.3E-03 4.9 33 11 0.52 115 483 85 G E 實施例19 100 - - - 1.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.010 4.6E-04 4.7 33 11 0.51 199 719 110 G E 實施例20 100 - - - 3.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.010 4.6E-04 5.4 37 12 0.52 143 729 60 G E 比較例1 100 - - - - 0.05 - 0.004 - - 2.3 29 10 0.61 2585 - 35 G G 比較例2 100 - - - - 0.10 - 0.008 - - 2.6 31 11 0.54 1306 - 65 G G 比較例3 100 - - - - 0.20 - 0.016 - - 3.0 34 15 0.33 873 - 110 G G 比較例4 - - - 100 - - 0.50 0.013 - - 22.6 248 60 0.30 1210 - 90 P G 比較例5 - - - 100 - - 1.10 0.028 - - 24.1 246 75 0.22 940 - 105 P G 比較例6 - - - 100 - - 2.50 0.063 - - 34.2 313 111 0.11 923 - 120 P A 比較例7 - - - 100 2.0 - 0.50 0.013 - - 26.2 250 61 0.31 330 735 80 P G 比較例8 - - - 100 2.0 - 1.10 0.028 - - 28.1 251 73 0.24 92 1227 105 P G 比較例9 - - - 100 2.0 - 2.50 0.063 - - 36.0 316 115 0.13 57 796 110 P A [Table 1] Table 1 Polymer (A) [parts] Polymer (B) [parts] Cross-linking agent (per serving) Mörby [NCO]/[OH] Media [share] Catalyst Möllby [catalyst]/[OH] Surface elastic modulus 23℃ [kPa] Volumetric elastic modulus 23℃ [kPa] Volumetric elastic modulus 80℃ [kPa] tanδ 80℃ Initial adhesion [gf/25 mm] Adhesion strength after heating [gf/25 mm] Bending resilience [°] Bending retention force Bubble formation A1 A2 A3 A4 C1 C2 Implementation Example 1 100 - - - 2.0 0.015 - 0.001 - - 1.2 33 8 0.79 325 2144 35 G G Implementation Example 2 100 - - - 2.0 0.05 - 0.004 - - 2.7 33 11 0.60 368 877 50 G G Implementation Example 3 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 5.1 33 11 0.51 256 821 90 G G Implementation Example 4 100 - - - 2.0 0.20 - 0.016 - - 6.9 33 14 0.41 209 607 90 G G Implementation Example 5 100 - - - 2.0 0.60 - 0.049 - - 10.8 41 twenty four 0.23 128 463 100 G A Implementation Example 6 100 - - - 0.4 0.10 - 0.008 - - 3.2 32 11 0.52 502 923 120 G G Implementation Example 7 100 - - - 1.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 4.8 32 12 0.52 221 750 115 G G Implementation Example 8 100 - - - 3.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 5.6 38 13 0.51 283 651 65 G G Implementation Example 9 100 - - - 6.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 6.8 39 14 0.51 185 495 60 G G Implementation Example 10 - 100 - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 - - 5.3 34 12 0.51 262 832 90 G G Implementation Example 11 - - 100 - 2.0 - 0.07 0.028 - - 15.1 81 52 0.25 275 547 105 G G Implementation Example 12 - - 100 - 2.0 - 0.09 0.036 - - 15.5 96 63 0.24 245 404 105 G A Implementation Example 13 - - 100 - 2.0 - 0.395 0.160 - - 17.8 114 88 0.13 186 331 110 G A Implementation Example 14 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.001 4.6E-05 5.1 33 12 0.51 105 602 90 G E Implementation Example 15 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.005 2.3E-04 5.1 33 12 0.52 159 624 85 G E Implementation Example 16 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.010 4.6E-04 5.0 33 11 0.51 160 641 90 G E Implementation Example 17 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.020 9.2E-04 5.1 34 13 0.51 134 644 90 G E Implementation Example 18 100 - - - 2.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.050 2.3E-03 4.9 33 11 0.52 115 483 85 G E Implementation Example 19 100 - - - 1.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.010 4.6E-04 4.7 33 11 0.51 199 719 110 G E Implementation Example 20 100 - - - 3.0 0.10 - 0.008 0.010 4.6E-04 5.4 37 12 0.52 143 729 60 G E Comparative example 1 100 - - - - 0.05 - 0.004 - - 2.3 29 10 0.61 2585 - 35 G G Comparative example 2 100 - - - - 0.10 - 0.008 - - 2.6 31 11 0.54 1306 - 65 G G Comparative example 3 100 - - - - 0.20 - 0.016 - - 3.0 34 15 0.33 873 - 110 G G Comparative example 4 - - - 100 - - 0.50 0.013 - - 22.6 248 60 0.30 1210 - 90 P G Comparative example 5 - - - 100 - - 1.10 0.028 - - 24.1 246 75 0.22 940 - 105 P G Comparative example 6 - - - 100 - - 2.50 0.063 - - 34.2 313 111 0.11 923 - 120 P A Comparative example 7 - - - 100 2.0 - 0.50 0.013 - - 26.2 250 61 0.31 330 735 80 P G Comparative example 8 - - - 100 2.0 - 1.10 0.028 - - 28.1 251 73 0.24 92 1227 105 P G Comparative example 9 - - - 100 2.0 - 2.50 0.063 - - 36.0 316 115 0.13 57 796 110 P A

如表1所示,實施例1~20之黏著劑包含聚合物(A)及聚合物(B),與不包含上述聚合物(B)之比較例1~6相比,初期黏著力被抑制得較低。又,實施例1~20之黏著劑之加熱後黏著力大幅地上升。進而,實施例1~20之補強用膜之黏著劑層之23℃表面彈性模數為1~20 kPa之範圍內,彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力亦良好。另一方面,上述23℃表面彈性模數為1~20 kPa之範圍外之比較例4~9中,於彎曲保持試驗中確認到剝離。As shown in Table 1, the adhesives of Examples 1-20 contain polymers (A) and (B), and compared with Comparative Examples 1-6 which do not contain polymer (B), the initial adhesive force is suppressed to a lower degree. Furthermore, the adhesive force of the adhesives of Examples 1-20 increases significantly after heating. Moreover, the flexural recovery and flexural holding power of the adhesive layer of the reinforcing film of Examples 1-20 are also good within the range of 1-20 kPa at 23°C. On the other hand, in Comparative Examples 4-9, which are outside the range of 1-20 kPa at 23°C, peeling was confirmed in the flexural holding test.

更具體而言,根據實施例1~5之對比,確認到如下傾向:黏著劑層之23℃表面彈性模數於1~20 kPa之範圍內越高,彎曲回復性越得到改善,初期黏著力及加熱後黏著力越低。實施例2~5之彎曲回復性優於實施例1,23℃表面彈性模數為2 kPa以上,80℃下之tanδ 80為0.10~0.60之範圍內。又,實施例5中,表面彈性模數、體積彈性模數均為較高值,加熱後黏著力上升與實施例1~4相比,為相對較低之結果,又,與上述其他實施例相比,有黏著劑層表面之氣泡產生量變多之傾向。實施例2~4中,初期黏著力、加熱後黏著力、彎曲回復性及彎曲保持力更均衡地得到改善,黏著劑層中之異氰酸基與羥基之莫耳比([NCO]/[OH])為0.002~0.03之範圍內。又,實施例1~4中,發現黏著劑層之23℃體積彈性模數G' 23無差異。又,關於實施例2~3,發現80℃體積彈性模數G' 80無差異。關於實施例1~5,相較於體積彈性模數,23℃表面彈性模數與彎曲回復性之相關關係更高。 More specifically, based on a comparison of Examples 1-5, the following trend was confirmed: the higher the surface elastic modulus of the adhesive layer at 23°C in the range of 1-20 kPa, the better the flexural resilience, and the lower the initial adhesion and the adhesion after heating. The flexural resilience of Examples 2-5 is better than that of Example 1, with a surface elastic modulus at 23°C of 2 or higher, and tanδ 80 at 80°C in the range of 0.10-0.60. Furthermore, in Example 5, both the surface elastic modulus and the volume elastic modulus are relatively high, and the increase in adhesion after heating is relatively low compared to Examples 1-4. Also, compared to the other examples mentioned above, there is a tendency for more bubbles to be generated on the surface of the adhesive layer. In Examples 2-4, the initial adhesion, post-heating adhesion, flexural resilience, and flexural holding power were improved more evenly, and the molar ratio of isocyanate groups to hydroxyl groups in the adhesive layer ([NCO]/[OH]) was in the range of 0.002-0.03. Furthermore, in Examples 1-4, no difference was found in the volumetric elastic modulus G'23 at 23°C for the adhesive layer. Also, regarding Examples 2-3, no difference was found in the volumetric elastic modulus G'80 at 80 °C. Regarding Examples 1-5, compared to the volumetric elastic modulus, the correlation between the surface elastic modulus at 23°C and flexural resilience was higher.

又,根據實施例6~9之對比,確認到聚合物(B)之使用量越增加,黏著力越降低之傾向。聚合物(B)之使用量相對於聚合物(A)100份為0.5~5份之範圍內的實施例7~8中,初期黏著力未達500 gf/25 mm,且加熱後黏著力為500 gf/25 mm以上,更好地兼顧了貼附初期之輕剝離性與加熱後黏著力上升。又,有聚合物(B)之使用量越多,則23℃表面彈性模數越高,彎曲回復性越低之傾向。又,根據實施例10~13之結果,確認到:即便變更黏著劑之聚合物(A)之種類或交聯劑種,亦可達成所期望之效果。與實施例12~13相比,實施例10~11之加熱後之黏著力上升量較大。Furthermore, based on the comparison of Examples 6-9, it was confirmed that the more polymer (B) is used, the lower the adhesive strength tends to be. In Examples 7-8, where the amount of polymer (B) used is in the range of 0.5 to 5 parts per 100 parts of polymer (A), the initial adhesive strength does not reach 500 gf/25 mm, but the adhesive strength after heating is more than 500 gf/25 mm, thus better balancing the easy peeling at the initial stage of adhesion and the increase in adhesive strength after heating. Also, the more polymer (B) is used, the higher the surface elastic modulus at 23°C and the lower the flexural resilience tends to be. Furthermore, based on the results of Examples 10-13, it was confirmed that even if the type of polymer (A) or the type of crosslinking agent of the adhesive is changed, the desired effect can still be achieved. Compared with Examples 12-13, the increase in adhesive force after heating in Examples 10-11 is greater.

進而,實施例14~20中,藉由使用觸媒,成功防止了氣泡產生。其中,實施例14~17、19~20中,鐵系觸媒之使用量係使黏著劑層所含之觸媒與羥基之莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])為4.6E-5(4.6×10 -5)~9.2E-4(9.2×10 -4)的量,相對於初期之低黏著力,加熱後黏著力充分上升。尤其是實施例19,最為均衡地改善了初期黏著力、加熱後黏著力、彎曲回復性、彎曲保持力及氣泡產生防止。 Furthermore, in Examples 14-20, the formation of bubbles was successfully prevented by using a catalyst. In Examples 14-17 and 19-20, the amount of iron-based catalyst used was such that the molar ratio of catalyst to hydroxyl group ([catalyst]/[OH]) in the adhesive layer was 4.6E-5 (4.6 × 10⁻⁵ ) to 9.2E-4 (9.2 × 10⁻⁴ ). Compared to the initial low adhesion, the adhesion increased significantly after heating. Example 19, in particular, showed the most balanced improvement in initial adhesion, adhesion after heating, flexural resilience, flexural holding power, and prevention of bubble formation.

以上,對本發明之具體例進行了詳細說明,但其等僅為例示,並非限定申請專利範圍。申請專利範圍所記載之技術包含將以上所例示之具體例進行各種變化、變更者。The above provides a detailed description of specific examples of the present invention, but these are merely illustrative and do not limit the scope of the patent application. The technology described in the patent application includes various changes and modifications to the specific examples illustrated above.

1,2,3:補強用膜 10:支持基材 10A:第一面 10B:第二面 21:黏著劑層(第一黏著劑層) 21A:黏著面(第一黏著面) 21B:黏著面(第二黏著面) 22:黏著劑層(第二黏著劑層) 22A:黏著面(第二黏著面) 31,32:剝離襯墊 100,200,300:附剝離襯墊之補強用膜 1, 2, 3: Reinforcing film 10: Supporting substrate 10A: First side 10B: Second side 21: Adhesive layer (first adhesive layer) 21A: Adhesive surface (first adhesive surface) 21B: Adhesive surface (second adhesive surface) 22: Adhesive layer (second adhesive layer) 22A: Adhesive surface (second adhesive surface) 31, 32: Peel-off pad 100, 200, 300: Reinforcing film with peel-off pad

圖1係模式性地表示一實施方式之補強用膜之構成之剖視圖。 圖2係模式性地表示另一實施方式之補強用膜之構成之剖視圖。 圖3係模式性地表示另一實施方式之補強用膜之構成之剖視圖。 Figure 1 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the structure of a reinforcing membrane in one embodiment. Figure 2 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the structure of a reinforcing membrane in another embodiment. Figure 3 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the structure of a reinforcing membrane in yet another embodiment.

1:補強用膜 10:支持基材 10A:第一面 10B:第二面 21:黏著劑層(第一黏著劑層) 21A:黏著面(第一黏著面) 31:剝離襯墊 100:附剝離襯墊之補強用膜 1: Reinforcing film 10: Supporting substrate 10A: First side 10B: Second side 21: Adhesive layer (first adhesive layer) 21A: Adhesive surface (first adhesive surface) 31: Peel-off pad 100: Reinforcing film with peel-off pad attached

Claims (8)

一種補強用膜,其具備黏著劑層, 上述黏著劑層包含聚合物(A)及聚合物(B), 上述聚合物(A)為丙烯酸系聚合物, 上述丙烯酸系聚合物包含1重量%以上20重量%以下之源自含羥基單體之單體單元, 上述聚合物(A)之玻璃轉移溫度TA為-80℃以上且未達-35℃, 上述聚合物(B)包含具有聚有機矽氧烷骨架之單體單元及(甲基)丙烯酸系單體單元, 上述黏著劑層中之上述聚合物(B)之含量相對於上述聚合物(A)100重量份為0.1~30重量份, 上述黏著劑層中包含相對於上述聚合物(A)100重量份為0.015重量份以上且未達1.0重量份之異氰酸酯系交聯劑, 上述黏著劑層於23℃下之表面彈性模數為1~20 kPa。A reinforcing film comprising an adhesive layer comprising a polymer (A) and a polymer (B), wherein polymer (A) is an acrylic polymer comprising 1% to 20% by weight of monomer units derived from hydroxyl-containing monomers, and the glass transition temperature TA of polymer (A) is -80°C or higher and not lower than -35°C; polymer (B) comprises monomer units having a polyorganosiloxane backbone and (meth)acrylic monomer units; the content of polymer (B) in the adhesive layer is 0.1 to 30 parts by weight relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A); and the adhesive layer comprises 0.015 parts by weight or higher and not more than 1.0 parts by weight relative to 100 parts by weight of polymer (A) of an isocyanate-based crosslinker. The surface elastic modulus of the above adhesive layer at 23°C is 1–20 kPa. 如請求項1之補強用膜,其中上述黏著劑層於23℃下之體積彈性模數G'23為10~200 kPa,於80℃下之體積彈性模數G'80為5~100 kPa,且於80℃下之tanδ80為0.10~0.60。For example, the reinforcing membrane of claim 1, wherein the volume elastic modulus G' 23 of the adhesive layer is 10 to 200 kPa at 23°C, the volume elastic modulus G' 80 is 5 to 100 kPa at 80°C, and the tanδ 80 at 80°C is 0.10 to 0.60. 如請求項1或2之補強用膜,其中上述黏著劑層中之上述聚合物(B)之含量相對於上述聚合物(A)100重量份為0.5~5重量份。For example, in the reinforcing film of claim 1 or 2, the content of the polymer (B) in the adhesive layer is 0.5 to 5 parts by weight relative to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A). 如請求項1或2之補強用膜,其中上述黏著劑層中所含之異氰酸基與羥基之莫耳比([NCO]/[OH])為0.002~0.03。For example, in the reinforcing membrane of claim 1 or 2, the molar ratio ([NCO]/[OH]) of isocyanate groups to hydroxyl groups contained in the adhesive layer is 0.002 to 0.03. 如請求項1或2之補強用膜,其中上述黏著劑層包含觸媒, 上述黏著劑層中所含之上述觸媒與羥基之莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])為1.0×10-6~5.0×10-2For example, in the reinforcing membrane of claim 1 or 2, the adhesive layer contains a catalyst, and the molar ratio ([catalyst]/[OH]) of the catalyst to the hydroxyl group contained in the adhesive layer is 1.0× 10⁻⁶ to 5.0× 10⁻² . 如請求項5之補強用膜,其中上述觸媒為鐵系觸媒, 上述黏著劑層中所含之上述觸媒與羥基之莫耳比([觸媒]/[OH])為1.0×10-4~1.0×10-3For example, in the reinforcing membrane of claim 5, the catalyst is an iron-based catalyst, and the molar ratio ([catalyst]/[OH]) of the catalyst to hydroxyl group contained in the adhesive layer is 1.0× 10⁻⁴ to 1.0× 10⁻³ . 一種光學構件,其貼合有如請求項1至6中任一項之補強用膜。An optical component having a reinforcing film as described in any of claims 1 to 6. 一種電子構件,其貼合有如請求項1至6中任一項之補強用膜。An electronic component having a reinforcing film attached as described in any of claims 1 to 6.
TW110128733A 2020-08-06 2021-08-04 Reinforcing membranes, optical components and electronic components TWI905243B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020134187A JP7645057B2 (en) 2020-08-06 2020-08-06 Reinforcing films, optical and electronic components
JP2020-134187 2020-08-06

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW202212125A TW202212125A (en) 2022-04-01
TWI905243B true TWI905243B (en) 2025-11-21

Family

ID=80117365

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW110128733A TWI905243B (en) 2020-08-06 2021-08-04 Reinforcing membranes, optical components and electronic components

Country Status (5)

Country Link
JP (1) JP7645057B2 (en)
KR (1) KR102849877B1 (en)
CN (1) CN116075426B (en)
TW (1) TWI905243B (en)
WO (1) WO2022030304A1 (en)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2008045027A (en) * 2006-08-16 2008-02-28 Nitto Denko Corp Double-sided adhesive tape or sheet and liquid crystal display device
WO2016021332A1 (en) * 2014-08-08 2016-02-11 日東電工株式会社 Building member with pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, and pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet for building member
WO2018034149A1 (en) * 2016-08-15 2018-02-22 日東電工株式会社 Adhesive layer for flexible image display devices, laminate for flexible image display devices, and flexible image display device
TW201923005A (en) * 2017-11-20 2019-06-16 日商日東電工股份有限公司 Reinforcing film having both low adhesion at an initial stage and strong adhesion at the time of use
JP2020066642A (en) * 2018-10-22 2020-04-30 日東電工株式会社 Pressure-bonding type adhesive tape
WO2020116229A1 (en) * 2018-12-03 2020-06-11 Dic株式会社 Adhesive composition and laminated film using same

Family Cites Families (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6373458B2 (en) 2013-04-15 2018-08-15 日東電工株式会社 Adhesive composition, adhesive layer, and adhesive sheet
CN105722935B (en) * 2013-11-22 2017-11-24 综研化学株式会社 Adhesive composition for optical film, adhesive optical film and laminate
KR101813764B1 (en) 2014-11-28 2017-12-29 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Adhesive composition for optical film, adhesive layer, optical member and image display device
JP6737585B2 (en) 2015-11-27 2020-08-12 三星エスディアイ株式会社SAMSUNG SDI Co., LTD. Adhesive composition, adhesive sheet and image display device
JP6755089B2 (en) 2015-11-27 2020-09-16 三星エスディアイ株式会社SAMSUNG SDI Co., LTD. Adhesive composition, adhesive layer, adhesive sheet, and image display device
JP6366200B2 (en) 2016-06-30 2018-08-01 日東電工株式会社 Reinforcing film with separator
JP6366199B2 (en) * 2016-06-30 2018-08-01 日東電工株式会社 Reinforcing film with separator
JP6371931B1 (en) * 2016-11-21 2018-08-08 日東電工株式会社 Adhesive sheet
JP7149699B2 (en) * 2017-11-01 2022-10-07 日東電工株式会社 Thermally conductive adhesive sheet
JP6605562B2 (en) * 2017-11-20 2019-11-13 日東電工株式会社 Adhesive sheet
JP6376271B1 (en) 2017-12-08 2018-08-22 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Manufacturing method of laminate for flexible device
JP7262484B2 (en) * 2018-11-30 2023-04-21 日東電工株式会社 Adhesive sheet
KR102799218B1 (en) * 2019-01-08 2025-04-23 닛토덴코 가부시키가이샤 Adhesive sheet

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2008045027A (en) * 2006-08-16 2008-02-28 Nitto Denko Corp Double-sided adhesive tape or sheet and liquid crystal display device
WO2016021332A1 (en) * 2014-08-08 2016-02-11 日東電工株式会社 Building member with pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, and pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet for building member
WO2018034149A1 (en) * 2016-08-15 2018-02-22 日東電工株式会社 Adhesive layer for flexible image display devices, laminate for flexible image display devices, and flexible image display device
TW201923005A (en) * 2017-11-20 2019-06-16 日商日東電工股份有限公司 Reinforcing film having both low adhesion at an initial stage and strong adhesion at the time of use
JP2020066642A (en) * 2018-10-22 2020-04-30 日東電工株式会社 Pressure-bonding type adhesive tape
WO2020116229A1 (en) * 2018-12-03 2020-06-11 Dic株式会社 Adhesive composition and laminated film using same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR102849877B1 (en) 2025-08-26
JP7645057B2 (en) 2025-03-13
CN116075426A (en) 2023-05-05
KR20230047162A (en) 2023-04-06
TW202212125A (en) 2022-04-01
WO2022030304A1 (en) 2022-02-10
CN116075426B (en) 2025-12-02
JP2022030291A (en) 2022-02-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6371931B1 (en) Adhesive sheet
CN100523109C (en) Adhesive and optical parts using the same
TWI741191B (en) Adhesive sheet
TWI843788B (en) Adhesive Sheet
TWI899301B (en) Reinforcement films, optical components and electronic components
TWI838427B (en) Adhesive sheet
JP6247571B2 (en) Adhesive composition and double-sided adhesive
TWI902860B (en) Reinforcing membranes, optical components and electronic components
TWI902859B (en) Reinforcing membranes, optical components and electronic components
TWI859315B (en) Adhesive Sheet
TWI905243B (en) Reinforcing membranes, optical components and electronic components
TW202444557A (en) Reinforcement film, optical component and electronic component